Hewlett-Packard 83500 8350A, 8350A, 8410 B, 8411A, 8755 C, 5343 A, 432, 11869A, 9825, 85 User manual

 83 50A
SWEEP OSCILLATOR
(Including Options 001 and 400)
SERIAL NUMBERS
This manual applies directly to HP Model 8350A
Sweep Oscillator having serial number prefix
2024A. |
With changes described in Section VII, this
manual also applies to instruments with serial
numbers prefixed 2007A and 2019A.
For additional information about serial numbers,
refer to INSTRUMENTS COVERED BY
MANUAL in Section L
O Copyright HEWLETT-PACKARD COMPANY 1980
1400 FOUNTAIN GROVE PARKWAY, SANTA ROSA, CA, 95404 U.S.A.
MANUAL PART NO, 08350-90001
MICROFICHE PART №0. 08350-90002
Printed: JANUARY 1981
HEWLETT
PACKARD
CERTIFICATION
Hewlett-Packard Company certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of
shipment from the factory. Hewlett-Packard further certifies that its calibration measurements are
traceable to the United States National Bureau of Standards, to the extent allowed by the Bureau's
calibration facility, and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization
members.
WARRANTY
This Hewlett-Packard instrument product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship
for a period of one year from date of shipment. During the warranty period, Hewlett-Packard Com-
pany will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective.
For warranty service or repair, this product must be returned to a service facility designated by HP.
Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to HP and HP shall pay shipping charges to return the product to
Buyer. However, Buyer shall pay all shipping charges, duties, and taxes for products returned to HP
from another country.
HP warrants that its software and firmware designated by HP for use with an instrument will execute
its programming instructions when properly installed on that instrument. HP does not warrant that the
operation of the instrument, or software, or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free.
LIMITATION OF WARRANTY
The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance
by Buyer, Buyer-supplied software or interfacing, unauthorized modification or misuse, operation
outside of the environmental specifications for the product, or improper site preparation or main-
tenance,
NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IM-
PLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES
THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. HP
SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSE-
QUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, OR ANY OTHER LEGAL
THEORY.
ASSISTANCE
Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Hewlett-
Packard products.
For any assistance, contact your nearest Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office. Addresses are
provided at the back of this manual.
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
GENERAL
This product and related documentation must be
reviewed for familiarization with safety markings
and instructions before operation. This product has
been designed and tested in accordance with inter-
national standards.
SAFETY SYMBOLS
Instruction manual symbol: the
nroduct will be marked with this
symbol when it is necessary for
the user to refer to the instruc-
tion manual (refer to Table of
Contents).
Indicates hazardous voltages.
+ Indicates earth (ground) terminal.
: à The WARNING sign denotes a
| WARNING | hazard. It calls attention to a
procedure, practice, or the like,
which, if not correctly performed
or adhered to, could result in
personal injury. Do not proceed
beyond a WARNING sign until
the indicated conditions are fully
understood and met.
ye The CAUTION sign denotes a
hazard. It calls attention to an
operating procedure, practice, or
the like, which, if not correctly
performed or adhered to, could
result in damage to or destruc-
tion of part or all of the product.
Do not proceed beyond a CAU-
TION sign until the indicated
conditions are fully understood
and met.
o
>
<
—
O
2
Sh ak Pate эль байна mth ER ol
SAFETY EARTH GROUND
This is a Safety Class I product (provided with a
protective earthing terminal). An uninterruptible
safety earth ground must be provided from the
main power source to the product input wiring ter-
minais, power cord, or supplied power cord set.
Whenever it is likely that the protection has been
impaired, the product must be made inoperative
and be secured against any unintended operation.
BEFORE APPLYING POWER
Verify that the product 18 configured to match the
available main power source per the input power
configuration instructions provided in this manual.
[f this product is to be energized via an autotrans-
former make sure the common terminal is con-
nected to the neutral (grounded side of mains
supply). |
SERVICING
| WARNING |
Any servicing, adjustment, maintenance,
or repair of this product must be per-
formed only by qualified personnel.
Adjustments described in this manual
may be performed with power supplied
to the product while protective covers
are removed. Energy available at many
points may, if contacted, result in per-
sonal injury.
Capacitors inside this product may still
be charged even when disconnected from
its power source,
To avoid a fire hazard, only fuses with
the required current rating and of the
specified type (normal blow, time delay,
etc.) are to be used for replacement.
General Information Model 8350A
.
.
= 5
E.
HP 8350A SWEEP OSCILLATOR
POWER CABLE"
*POWER CABLE/PLUG SUPPLIED DEPENDS ON COUNTRY OF DESTINATION. REFER TO SECTION |i FOR PART
NUMBER INFORMATION.
Figure 1-1. Model 83504 Sweep Oscillator
Model 8350A
General Information
SECTION |
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-1. INTRODUCTION
1-2. This Operating and Service Manual con-
tains information required to install, operate, test,
adjust, and service the Hewlett-Packard Model
8350A Sweep Oscillator. Figure 1-1 shows the
Model 8350A and power cable.
1-3. This manual is divided into eight major
sections which provide the following information:
a. SECTION I, GENERAL INFORMATION,
includes a brief description of the instru-
ment, safety considerations, specifications,
supplemental characteristics, instrument
identification, options available, accessories
available, and a list of recommended test
equipment.
b. SECTION IL INSTALLATION, provides
information for initial inspection, prepar-
ation for use, battery information, rack
mounting, storage, and shipment.
с. SECTION IH, OPERATION, consists of
three subsections which contain general
operating information, local operation infor-
mation (non-HP-IB), and remote operation
information (Programming Notes which
provide information on HP-IB use of the
Model 8350A).
d. SECTION IV, PERFORMANCE TESTS,
presents procedures required to verify that
performance of the instrument is in accord-
ance with published specifications. Per-
formance Tests which are general to most RF
plug-in units are given in the section. Per-
formance Test limits and other special tests
related to specific RF plug-ins are supplied in
each RF plug-in Operating and Service
Manual. Included 1s a Local and Remote
Operation Verification procedure.
e. SECTION V, ADJUSTMENTS, presents
procedures required to properly adjust and
align the Model 8350A Sweep Oscillator
mainframe after repair. Refer to the Oper-
ating and Service Manual of the specific RF
plug-in used for adjustments related to the
RF plug-in.
f SECTION VI, REPLACEABLE PARTS,
provides information required to order all
parts and assemblies,
g SECTION VIH, MANUAL BACKDATING
CHANGES, provides backdating informa-
ton reguired to make this manual com-
patible with earlier shipment configurations.
h. SECTION VIII, SERVICE, provides an
overall instrument block diagram with
troubleshooting and repair procedures. Each
assembly within the instrument is covered on
a separate Service Sheet which contains a
circuit description, schematic diagram, com-
ponent location diagram, and troubleshoot-
ing information to aid the proper mainten-
ance of the instrument.
1-4. Supplied with this manual is an Operating
Information Supplement. This is simply a copy of
the first three sections of the manual which should
be kept with the instrument for use by the
instrument operator.
1-5. On the front cover of this manual is a
“Microfiche” part number. This number may be
used to order 10- by 15-centimeter (4- by 6-inch)
microfilm transparencies of the Manual. Each
microfiche contains up to 60 photo duplicates of
the manual pages. The microfiche package also
includes the latest Manual Changes sheet as well
as all pertinent Service Notes.
1-6. Refer any questions regarding this manual,
the Manual Changes sheet, or the instrument to
the nearest HP Sales/Service Office. Always
identify the instrument by model number, com-
plete name, and complete serial number in all
correspondence. Refer to the inside rear cover of
this manual for a worldwide listing of HP
Sales/Service Offices.
1-1
General Information
Model 8350A
Table 1-1. Model 83504 Specifications (1 of 2)
SPECIFICATIONS
B350A SWEEP OSCILLATOR
(with AF Plug-in installed)
FREQUENCY CONTROL FUNCTIONS
Range: Determined by RF plug-in unit used.
Linearity: Refer to RF plug-in unit specifications.
START/STOP Sweeps: Sweeps up from the START
frequency to the STOP frequency.
Range: START and STOP parameters are inde-
pendent, fully calibrated, and continuously
adjustable over the entire frequency range.
STOP frequency must be greater than or equal
to START frequency.
CF/AF Sweep: Sweeps symmetrically upward in
frequency, centered on the CF (Center Fre-
quency) setting.
AF: Frequency width of sweep. Continuously
adjustable from zero to 100% of frequency
range, START/STOP and CF/AF modes can
be interchanged without affecting RF output.
AF Accuracy: Refer to RF plug-in unit specifi-
cations.
CF Accuracy: Refer to RF plug-in unit specifica-
tions.
CF Resolution: 0.024% (4096 points across band).
AF Resolution: 0.1% of full band (1024 points
across band); 0.012% of full band for 1/8 band
or less (8192 points across band); 0.0015% of
full band for 1/64 band or less (16,384 points
across band).
Display Resolution: 5 digits maximum,
CW Operation: Single frequency RF output When
changing between CF/AF and CW mode, the CW
frequency and the Center Frequency (CF) are
equivalent.
CW Accuracy: Refer to RF plug-in unit specifi-
cations.
CW Resolution: Same as CF.
Vernier: Adjusts CW frequency of swept range up to
+ 0.05% of RE plug-in band being swept. The
vernier adds its value to the appropriate fre-
quency parameter and then resets to zero when
the adjustment exceeds == 0.05% for continuous
adjustment. The "5207 LED 1s on whenever a
vernier adjustment value is present.
Vernier Resolution: 4 ppm {64 points between
each CW point; 262,144 points across band).
Offset: Allows the CW frequency or center frequency
of swept range to be offset by any amount up to the
full range of the RF plug-in. After entering an
offset and returning the displays to the previous
mode, the “#0” LED will be on indicating thatan
offset is present; however, the display will remain
unchanged.
Resolution: Same as CF,
Accuracy: Refer to RF plug-in unit specifi-
cations.
Frequency Markers: Five frequency markers are
independently adjustable and fully calibrated
over the entire sweep range. Front panel key
provides for the selection of either amplitude or
intensity markers.
Resolution: 0.4% of selected sweep width (250
points/sweep).
Accuracy: Refer to RF plug-in unit specifications.
Marker Output: Negative rectangular pulse avail-
able from the POS Z BLANK connector on the
rear panel Refer to Table 1-2.
1-2
Model 8350A
General Information
Table 1-1. Model 83504 Specifications (2 of 2)
Marker Sweep: RF output is swept between Marker |
and Marker? frequency values. The Marker] and
Marker 2 frequency values can be entered as
permanent sweep values with the SHIFT key.
Pressing MKR SWEEP again returns the instru-
ment to the last START/STOP values.
Marker— CF: Marker-to-Center Frequency function
causes the CW or Center Frequency (CF) of the
sweep output to equal the frequency of the active
marker.
SWEEP AND TRIGGER MODES
internal: Sweep recurs automatically.
Line: Sweep triggered by ac power line frequency.
External Trigger Sweep is actuated by an external
trigger signal applied to pin 9 of the rear panel
Programming Connector on the rear panel
Trigger signal must be > +2 Vdc, wider than 0.5
us, and not greater than 1 MHz in frequency.
Single: Selects mode and triggers/aborts a single
sweep.
Sweep Time: Continuously adjustable from 10 ms to
100 seconds. Minimum sweep time may be more
than 10 ms depending upon the specific RF plug-
in used and the bandwidth swept.
Manual Sweep: Front panel controls (knobs, key-
board, and step keys) provide continuous manual
adjustment of frequency between end frequencies
set in any of the sweep functions. Resolution is
0.1% of selected sweep width (980 points across
sweep).
External Sweep: Sweep is controlled by a zero to +10
volt sweep ramp external signal applied to the
front or rear panel SWEEP OUTPUT/SWEEP
INPUT connectors. Resulting RF Output fre-
quency accuracy will be a function of input sweep
ramp accuracy and linearity.
Sweep Output: Positive-going, direct-coupled saw-
tooth at front and rear panel SWEEP OUTPUT/
SWEEP INPUT connectors, concurrent with
swept RIF output. In CW mode, dc output is
proportional to the RF plug-in unit full-band
frequency. Refer to Table 1-2.
MODULATION CHARACTERISTICS
External AM: Refer to RF plug-in unit specifications.
Rear panel BNC connector.
Internal AM: Square wave modulation available atall
sweep speeds through {front panel control. Refer
to RF plug-in for On/Off ratio specifications.
Refer to Table 1-2 for frequency characteristics.
External FM: Refer to RF plug-in unit specifications.
Rear panel BNC connector,
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Blanking
RF Blankin g When enabled, RF automatically is
turned off during retrace and remains off until
the start of next sweep.
Display Blanking: POS Z BLANK; direct-coupled,
positive rectangular pulse during retrace and
bandswitch points of sweep. Negative intensity
marker signals are also output through this
connector. NEG Z BLANK; direct-coupled,
negative rectangular pulse during retrace and
bandswitch points of sweep. Both are rear
panel BNC outputs. Refer to Table 1-2.
Pen Lift. Output to control the pen lift function of an
X-Y recorder. Refer to Table 1-2 for maximum
sink current rating,
Counter Trigger (CNTR TRIG): Output for controlling
the external trigger input of the HP 5343A
Microwave Frequency Counter. Rear panel BNC
connector.
Stop Sweep: Input for stopping the progress of a
forward sweep. Rear panel BNC connector.
General Information
Model 8350A
Table 1-2. Model 83504 Supplemental Characteristics (1 of 2)
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS
Frequency Marker Output: Rectangular pulse, typi-
cally —3 volts peak, available from the POS Z
BLANK connector on the rear panel. Source
impedance 1s approximately 1000 ohms.
External Sweep: Sweep 1s controlled by an External
Sweep Input signal applied to the front or rear
panel SWEEP OUTPUT/SWEEP INPUT con-
nectors. The External Sweep Input must be zero
voits at start of sweep, increasing linearly to +10
volts at the end of sweep.
Sweep Output. Direct-coupled sawtooth, zero to
approximately +10 volts, at front and rear panel
SWEEP OUTPUT/SWEEP INPUT connectors
concurrent with swept RF output. Zero volts at
start of sweep, approximately +10 volts at end of
sweep, regardless of sweep width, In CW mode, dc
output 1s proportional to the RF plug-in unit full-
band frequency. In SHIFT CW mode, a0 to +10
volt ramp is output, regardless of CW frequency.
MODULATION CHARACTERISTICS
Internal AM: Square wave modulation available at all
sweep speeds. Factory preset to 27.8 kHz although
selectable (via internal jumper) to 1000 Hz or 27.8
kHz. Refer to RF plug-in for On/Off ratio
specifications.
INSTRUMENT CONTROL
Control Knobs, Step Keys, and Data Entry Keyboard: Al
instrument parameters, whether time, frequency,
or power, may be set in three ways. The control
knobs allow for continuous adjustment of any
parameter. An exact function value can be
entered fhrough the Data Entry Keyboard. For
incrementing or decrementing power or fre-
quency values, the Step Keys (Step Up/Step
Down) can be used. The step size can be entered
by the user or the pre-programmed default values
may be used. The SHIFT key is used to effect the
function written in blue on the front panel
SUPPLEMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
B360A SWEEP OSCILLATOR
{with RF Plug-in installed)
INSTRUMENT STATE STORAGE
SAVE n/RECALL n: Up to 9 different front panel
settings can be stored in the 8350A via the SAVE n
(n==1 through 9) function. Instrument settings are
stored in memory locations I through 9 and can
berecalled randomlyorinsequence(l,... 5.1, ..)
with Step Up/Step Down keys or by contact
closure to ground of the Step Up Advance (pin 22
on the rear panel Programming Connector).
ALT n: The ALT n function causes the RF output to
alternate on successive sweeps between the
current front panel setting and the setting stored
in memory location n (n=1 through 9).
INSTRUMENT STATE
Instrument Preset: The Instrument Preset (INSTR
PRESET) key sets the 8350A into the following
predetermined state; the RF output is swept over
the full frequency range of the RF plug-in at the
specified maximum leveled power level (an RF
OFF condition can be selected by a presetable
configuration switch located within the RF plug-
in), the internal square wave AM 1s off, and the
frequency markers are off. Instrument Preset also
causes an internal analog and digital self-test to
occur. If certain internal errors or failures are
detected during the self-test or during normal
operation of the 8350A, they are indicated via
error code messages in the formof “Ennn” (where
n=0 through 9) read from the left FREQUENCY
display.
Local Operation: The Local (LCL) key is used to
return the 8350A to local control from the
remotely controlled state. The REM LED indi-
cates when the 8350A 1s being controlled remotely.
The ADRS D LED indicates when data is being
transmitted or received over the HP-IB.
1-4
Model 8350A
General Information
Table 1-2. Model 83504 Supplemental Characteristics (2 of 2)
REMOTE PROGRAMMING (HP-1B)
Instrument Control: All front panel controls except
the line power switch may be controlled or
programmed remotely. The 53504 is fully com-
patible with the HP-1B. The 8350A has both input
and output capability, providing complete con-
trol of the instrument state. The HP-IB address
can be displayed on the front panel and is
selectable by the user from 0 to 30. Refer to Table
2-3 for a listing of HP-IB address codes.
HP-IB Functions
Input Mode Functions: All front panel controls
except the ac power line switch are pro-
grammable, Functions that require numerical
values typically have greater entry resolution
than 1s displayed. Several special HP-IB
functions are provided that are not available
from the front panel.
Frequency Resolution: Same as CF/AF plus
vernier.
Power Resolution: Refer to RF plug-in unit
specifications.
Output Mode Functions: The 8350A can outputto
a controller an instrument state message that
completely describes the present instrument
status (sweep mode, trigger mode, etc.) and can
supply the present numerical value of any
function (sweep time, marker frequencies,
power levels, start/stop frequencies, etc.).
GENERAL
Nonvolatile Memory
Option 001: Continuous memory that retains the
contents of all instrument state storage
registers and the HP-1B address along with the
current instrument state when the ac power is
turned off for approximately 20 days.
Display Blanking Outputs
POS Z BLANK: Direct-coupled rectangular
pulse approximately +5 volts during retrace and
bandswitch points of sweep. Intensity marker
signals are also output through this rear panel
BNC connector. Marker signals are —4 volt
pulses with the exception of the active marker
which 15 —8 volts.
NEG Z BLANK: Direct-coupled rectanguiar
pulse approximately —5 volts during retrace and
bandswitch points of sweep. No markers are
output from this rear panel BNC connector.
Pen Lift Output Output to control the pen lift
function of an X-Y recorder. Maximum sink
current is approximately 600ma.
Rear Panel Programming Connector: Additional control
of and information on the 8350A instrument state
is provided via a 25-pin rear panel connector.
Output signals such as display and RF blanking,
X-Y recorder pen lift, HP 8410B and HP 5343A
interface signals. Input signals affect the sweep
status, display and RF blanking, pen lift outputs,
etc. Refer to Figure 2-7 for a complete listing of
signals and voltages on the rear panel Pro-
gramming Connector.
84188 Interface Cable: Permits multi-octave opera-
tion of HP 8410B Network Analyzer with the
8350A (order HP Part Number 08410-60146).
Connects between 8410B rear panel SOURCE
CONTROL and 8350A rear panel PROGRAM-
MING CONNECTOR.
Furnished: 2.29m (7.5 foot) power cable with NEMA
plug; spare fuses; two extender boards for servicing;
1.0m (3.3 foot) HP-IB cable.
Operating Temperature Range: 0°C to +55°C,
Power: 100, 120, 220, or 240 volts, +5% —10%, 50 to 60
Hz (Option 400; 60 to 400 Hz). Approximately 270
volt-amps including RF plug-in unit (depends
upon specific RF plug-in unit used).
Weight (not including RF plug-in unit): Net 16.5 kg
(36.4 1b) Shipping 22.7 kg (50 15).
Dimensions: 425 W, 133.3 H, 422 mm D (16.75 x 5,25 x
16.6 in).
1-5
General Information
1-7. SPECIFICATIONS
1-8. Listed in Table 1-1 are the specifications for
the Model 8350A Sweep Oscillator. These speci-
fications are the performance standards, or limits,
against which the instrument may be tested. Only
the specifications for the Model 8350A Sweep
Oscillator mainframe are given in this manual.
Refer to the Operating and Service Manual for the
specific RF plug-in used for complete specifr-
cations relating to the RF plug-in. Table 1-2 lists
the sweep oscillator supplemental characteristics.
Supplemental characteristics are not specifica-
tions but are typical characteristics included as
additional information for the user.
1-9. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
1-10. General
1-11. This product and related documentation
must be reviewed for familiarization with safety
markings and instructions before operation. This
product has been manufactured and tested 1n
accordance with international safety standards.
1-12. Safety Symbols
1-13. A complete listing of the safety symbols
used in this manual is given on the page preceding
Figure 1-1. Included are descriptions of symbols
which refer the operator to the manual from the
instrument, Protective Earth Ground, Frame or
Chassis Terminals, Warning, and Caution
symbols.
1-14. INSTRUMENTS COVERED BY
MANUAL
1-15. Attached to the rear panel of the instru-
ment is a serial number plate. A typical serial
number plate is shown in Figure 1-2. The serial
SERIAL NUMBER
E *
PREFIX SUFFIX
A Va
SER 1839A 00285
C) OPT 001 O
Figure 1-2. Typical Serial Number Plate
Model 8350A
number is in two parts. The first four digits
followed by a letter comprise the serial number
prefix. The last five digits form the sequential
suffix that is unique to each instrument. The
content of this manual applies directly to instru-
ments having the same serial number prefix as
those listed on the title page of this manual under
SERIAL NUMBER
1-16. An instrument manufactured after the
printing of this manual may have a serial prefix
that is not listed on the title page. An unlisted
serial prefix indicates that the instrument is
different from those documented 1п this manual.
The manual for the instrument is then supplied
with a Manual Changes supplement that contains
information that documents the differences.
1-17. In addition to change information, the
Manual Changes supplement contains informa-
tion for correcting errors in the manual. To keep
this manual as current as possible, Hewlett-
Packard recommends that you periodically
request the latest Manual Changes supplement.
The supplement for this manual is keyed to the
manuals print date and part number, both of
which appear on the title page. Complimentary
copies of the Manual Changes supplement are
available on request from Hewlett-Packard.
1-18. For information concerning a serial num-
ber prefix that is not listed on the title page or in
the Manual Changes Supplement, contact your
nearest Hewlett-Packard Sales/Service Office.
1-19. DESCRIPTION
1-20. The Hewlett-Packard Model 8350A Sweep
Oscillator, together with an REF plug-in unit, forms
a complete, solid-state, swept signal source. The
Model 8350A can be used with network analyzer
systems such as the HP Model 8410B Network
Analyzer, the HP Model 8755 Frequency
Response Test Set, and the HP Microwave Link
Analyzers to provide a complete measurement
system.
1-21. The front panel of the Model 8350A has
been conveniently laid out to optimize the use of
instrument operation function blocks. Frequency
modes, sweep modes, marker operation, storage
register control, and data entry controls are
individually grouped for ease of operation and full
control versatility on the Model 8350A Sweep
Oscillator.
Model 8350A
1-22. Upon initial turn on, or after the
INSTRument PRESET pushbutton 1s selected,
the instrument automatically goes through an
internal seif check routine to verify proper instru-
ment operation. If certain errors or failures are
detected during the self test or in normal
operation, they are indicated via error codes
displayed on the far left digital display. An
INSTRument PRESET condition 1s then set
which automatically presets the sweep oscillator
to full RF plug-in band sweep operation.
1-23. Accurate High Resolution Data
Entry
1-24. Accurate, high resolution digital displays
indicate all major function values. Function
values may be set by activating the appropriate
pushbutton and using the corresponding knob,
step keys, or data entry keyboard to enter the
desired values.
1-25. Sweep and Trigger Modes
1-26. The sweep may be triggered INTernally,
through ac power LINE frequency, EXTernally,
or in SINGLE sweep operation. SWEEP TIME is
continuously variable from 10 ms to 100 seconds.
(Minimum sweep time may be greater than 10 ms
depending upon the specific RF plug-in used and
the bandwidth being swept). A MANual SWEEP
function allows the data entry controls to provide
continuous manual adjustment of frequency
between the end frequencies set in any of the
sweep functions. A direct coupled sawtooth sweep
ramp, zero to approximately 10 volts, is available
through both front and rear panel SWEEP
OUTPUT/SWEEP INPUT BNC connectors.
1-27. START/STOP Mode
1-28. The START/STOP frequency sweep mode,
selected upon Instrument Preset, is indicated by
yellow LEDs located above the selected operation
pushbuttons. In this mode the Model 8350A
sweeps up from the START frequency to the
STOP frequency. START and STOP freguencies
are indicated on the FREQUENCY LED dis-
plays. START frequency or STOP frequency may
then be changed through the use of the data entry
controls.
1-29. CW Mode
1-30. When CW (Continuous Wave) mode is
selected, the instrument is tuned to a single
General Information
frequency RF Output, indicated on the FRE-
QUENCY LED display. CW mode operation is
indicated by the yellow LED located above the
CW pushbutton. CW frequency, when enabled,
may be varied through the use of the data entry
controls. When the SHIFT CW mode is selected, a
0 to 10 volt sweep ramp will be output at the front
and rear panel SWEEP OUTPUT/SWEEP IN-
PUT BNC connectors, even though the RF
frequency 1s fixed in the CW mode.
1-31. CF/AF Mode
1-32. The CF/AF frequency sweep mode allows
the instrument to sweep upward in frequency,
symmetrically centered about a CF (Center Fre-
quency) setting. CEF/AF sweep mode operation is
indicated by the yellow LEDs centered above the
CF and AF pushbuttons. CF and AF frequencies
may be individually varied through use of the data
entry controls. START/STOP and CF/AF sweep
modes may be interchanged without affecting the
RF Output When changing between CF/AF
sweep mode and CW mode, the CW frequency
and the Center Frequency (CF) are equivalent.
1-33. Frequency Marker Operation
1-34. Five independent, continuously variable,
amplitude or intensity markers are available to
note significant points on the frequency sweep.
Marker selection is indicated by a yellow LED
located within each Marker pushbutton. Marker
frequency is indicated on the FREQUENCY/
TIME LED display. The frequency difference
between any two markers can be displayed by the
MKRA function. A MKR SWEEP function
allows a frequency sweep using Marker 1 and
Marker 2 as the START/STOP frequency limits
while maintaining the original START/STOP
values. For greater accuracy, marker frequencies
can also be counted directly using the HP Model
3343 A Microwave Frequency Counter. The sweep
is momentarily stopped allowing the counter to
measure the START, STOP, or activated marker
frequency.
1-35. Instrument State Storage
1-36. Upto9 different front panel settings can be
stored and recalled in the Model 8350A via the
SAVE n (n=1 through 9) function. The ALT n
function causes the RF Output to alternate on
successive sweeps between the current front panel
setting and the setting stored in the recalled
memory location (n=1 through 9). This allows the
1-7
General information
Model 8350A to work in conjunction with the HP
Model 8755 Frequency Response Test Set to allow
two different measurements to be made simul-
taneously by utilizing two different sweep widths
and/or power levels.
1-37. Modulation Characteristics
1-38. The Model 8350A is capable of internally
square wave modulating the RF Output at a 27.8
kHz or 1 kHz (selected by an internal jumper)
modulation frequency, as controlled by the front
panel Square Wave Modulation pushbutton. The
RF Output may also be Amplitude or Frequency
modulated by an external source via the Model
8350A Sweep Oscillator rear panel mputs.
1-39. Remote Programming (HP-IB)
1-40. АН front panel controls, except the line
power switch, may be controlled or programmed
remotely via the rear panel HP-IB interface
connector. The Model 8350A can also output to a
controller an instrument state message that com-
pletely describes the current instrument status
(sweep mode, trigger mode, etc.) and can supply
the present numerical value of any function
(sweep time, marker frequencies, power levels,
START/STOP frequencies, etc.).
1-41, Other Features
1-42. The Model 8350A also provides RF output
blanking during sweep retrace and rear panel
positive and negative polarity display blanking
outputs for retrace and bandswitching points of
sweep. A rear panel PEN LIFT output generates a
pulse which is coincident in time with the end-
points of the sweep. A COUNTER TRIGGER
outputand STOP SWEEP input are also available
on the rear panel to interface with the HP Model
5343A Microwave Frequency Counter. A 25-pin
rear panel Programming Connector provides
additional control of and information on the
Model 8350A instrument state. A listing of pin
configuration and signals on the Programming
Connector is given 1n Figure 2-7. Output signals
on the Programming Connector supplement
other rear panel output signals such as display
and RF blanking, X-Y recorder penlift, and HP
Model 8410B and HP Model 5343A interface
signals. Input signals on the Programming Con-
nector affect the sweep status, display and RF
blanking, penlift outputs, etc.
1-8
Model 8350A
1-43. To have a complete operating unit, the
Model 8350A Sweep Oscillator must be used in
conjunction with an RF plug-in unit which
operates in the desired frequency range. The HP
Model 83500 Series RF Plug-in units have been
specifically designed for use with the Model
8350A. With the addition of the Model 11869A RF
Plug-in Adapter, the HP Model 86200 Series RF
Plug-ins may also be used with the Model 8350A.
1-44. OPTIONS
1-45. Option 001, Nonvolatile Memory
1-46. Option 001 instruments contain a battery
pack (inserted in the battery holder with a battery
hold down clamp) and a special A3 Micro-
processor board. With Option 001 installed, the
Model 8350A has a nonvolatile memory which
retains the contents of all instrument state storage
registers, the current instrument state, and the HP-
IB address. When fully charged, the batteries will
retain a sufficient charge to hold the memory
contents for approximately 20 days. The batteries
are charged within the instrument and a full
charge is maintained when the instrument LINE
switch is ON.
1-47. An Option 001 Battery Kit may be ordered
for standard Model 8350A Sweep Oscillators to
upgrade them to Option 001 capability by
ordering HP Part Number 08350-60013. This kit
contains a battery pack, a battery pack hold down
ciamp, and a special A3 Microprocessor board.
All other necessary wiring and hardware connec-
tions have been made at the factory on all
standard instruments.
1-48. Option 400, 400 Hz AC Power
Operation
1-49. The standard Model 8350A requires that the
ac power line frequency be 50 to 60 Hz. Option 400
allows the instrument to operate with a 400 Hz ac
power line frequency.
1-50. Option 807, Front Handles Kit
1-51. Option 907, HP Part Number 5061-0089,
contains a pair of front handles and the necessary
hardware for mounting the handles to the Model
8350A. Refer to Section IT of this Operating and
Service Manual for a detailed description of this
kit and instructions for installation.
Model 8350A
1-52. Option 908, Rack Mount Kit
1-53. Option 908, HP Part Number 5061-0077,
contains a pair of flanges and the necessary
hardware to mount the Model 8350A in an
equipment rack with 482.6 mm (19 inches) hori-
zontal spacing. Refer to Section II of this Oper-
ating and Service Manual for a detatiled descrip-
tion of this kit and instructions for installation.
1-54. Option 909, Rack Mount/Front
Handles Kit
1-55. Option 909, HP Part Number 5061-0083,
contains one Option 907 Front Handles Kit and
one Option 908 Rack Mount Kit (see descriptions
in preceding paragraphs). Refer to Section II of
this Operating and Service Manual for a detailed
description of this kit and instructions for
installation.
1-56. Option 910, Extra Operating and
Service Manual |
1-57. The standard instrument 1s supplied with
one Operating and Service Manual. Each Option
910 provides one additional Operating and Service
Manual. To obtain additional Operating and
Service Manuals after initial shipment, order by
manual part number, listed on the title page and
rear cover of this manual.
1-58. ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED
1-59. Figure 1-1 shows the Model 8350A and
power cable. The power cable supplied depends
upon the country of destination. Refer to Section
H of this manual for HP Part Number infor-
mation.
1-60. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED BUT NOT
SUPPLIED
1-61. To have a complete operating sweep
oscillator, the Model 8350A Sweep Oscillator
must have an RF plug-in unit installed. The HP
83500 Series RF Plug-ins have been specifically
designed for use with the Model 8350A. They
provide calibrated output power levels, calibrated
power sweeps, internal leveling and slope control,
and full HP-IB programmability. Economical use
of the HP Model 86200 Series RF Plug-ins may be
untilized with the Model 8350A with the addition
of the HP Model 11869A RF Plug-in Adapter. The
Model 11869A mounts at the rear of the Model
General Information
86200 Series RF Plug-in and provides the interface
for signals and voltages from the Model 8350A to
the RF plug-in. All of the Model 8350A standard
operating features including HP-IB remote
programming are available, however, specific RF
plug-in functions (output power level, RF on/off,
etc.) cannot be controlled or remotely pro-
grammed by the Model 8350A mainframe.
1-62. To use the HP-IB capabilities of the Model
8350A, a computing controller such as the HP
9825 Desktop Computer or the HP 85 Personal
Computer is needed.
1-63. EQUIPMENT AYAILABLE
1-64. Service Accessories
1-65. A Service Accessory Kit (HP Part Number
08350-60020) is available for servicing the 8350A
and 83500-series RF plug-ins. The accessory kit
includes:
e Two 44-pm printed circuit board extenders.
The HP Part Number for each extender is
08350-60031. These boards have keyed slots
which allow them to be used in trouble-
shooting the Model 83500-series RF Plug-ins
as well.
® An RF Plug-in extender cable set that
provides all electrical connections when the
RE Plug-in 1s removed from the sweep
oscillator. The RF Plug-in Interface Con-
nector 15 extended by one cable (HP Part
Number 08350-60034) and the Power Supply
Interface connector 1s extended by the other
cable (HP Part Number 08350-60035).
e One hex Balldriver (HP Part Number 8710-
0523). Used to remove the hold down plate
hex screws from the front panel when repair
is necessary.
e One 16-pin LC. Test Clip (HP Part Number
1400-0734) and one 20-pin LC. Test Clip (HP
Part Number 1400-0979) are provided as an
aid for probing Integrated Circuits when
troubleshooting.
1-66. Model 8410B/8411A Network
Analyzer
1-67. The Model 8350A Sweep Oscillator is
compatible with the HP Model 8410B Network
Analyzer system. The combination of the Model
1-9
General Information
8410B Network Analyzer, the Model 8411A
- Frequency Converter, and an appropriate display
plug-in forms a phasemeter and a ratiometer for
direct phase and amplitude ratio measurementon
RF voltages. These measurements can be made on
single frequencies and on swept frequencies from
110 MHz to 18 GHz. Several RF plug-in units for
the Model 8350A are capable of multi-octive
sweeps in this range. The Model 8410B has an
Auto-Frequency range mode which gives it the
capability of automatically tracking the Model
8350A Sweep Oscillator over octave and multi-
octave frequency bands. Two interconnections to
the Model 8350A are necessary to ensure that the
Model 8410B will phase lock properly. The Model
8410B Source Control Cable (HP 08410-60146)
connects the Model 8410B rear panel SOURCE
CONTROL connector to the Model 8350A rear
panel PROGRAMMING CONNECTOR. Addi-
tionally, the sweep oscillator RF plug-in 1V/GHz
output connects to the Model 8410B rear panel
FREQ REF INPUT. The Model 8410B Source
Control Cable connector pins and signals are
illustrated in Table 1-3. |
1-68. Medel 8755 Frequency Response
Test Set
1-69. The Model B350A Sweep Oscillator is
compatible with the Model 8755 Frequency
Response Test Set for broadband swept scalar
Model 8350A
measurements. The Model 8350A provides in-
ternal 27.8 kHz square wave modulation of the RF
output eliminating unnecessary cable connec-
tions to the Model 8755 or the use of an external
modulator. The Model 8350A can also produce
alternate sweeps through use of the ALT n
function which works in conjunction with the
channel switching circuits in the Model 8755C.
This permits Channel 1 on the Model 8755C to
respond only to the Model 8350A current state and
Channel? to the alternate state. A single cable (HP
Part Number 8120-3174) connects between the
Model 8350A rear panel ALT SWP INTERFACE
connector and the Model 8755C front panel ALT
SWP INTERFACE connector.
1-70. Power Meters and Crystal Detectors
1-71. Depending upon the RF plug-in unit used,
the RE output can be externally leveled using the
HP Model 432 Power Meter or negative polarity
output crystal detectors. Refer to the Operating
and Service Manual of the specific RF plug-in
used for detailed information on leveling systems
that may be used with the Model 8350A/RF Plug-
in combination.
NOTE
The Model 435A and 438A Power Meters
should not be used in Model 8350A ex-
ternal leveling systems.
Table 1-3. Model 8410E Source Control Cable
84108 Source Control Cable HP Part Number 08410-60146
8350A Connector Pin 84108 Connector Pin Wi
Mnemonic Description (25-pin D Type Male (14-pin Micro Ribbon Male Color Code
HP Part No. 1251-0063) | HP Part No. 1251-0142)
L SSRQ - Low = Stop Sweep 7 905
Request
SYNC TRG High = Synchronizing 1 901
Trigger
GND DIG Digital Ground {1 90
Model 8350A
Table 1-4. Recommended Test Equipment (1 of 4)
General Information
instrument
Critical Specifications
Recommended Model
Use?
Spectrum Analyzer
Oscilloscope
Display Mainframe
Swept Amplitude
Analyzer
Detector
Power Splitter
Storage-Normalizer
Digital Voltmeter
Universal Counter
Oscilloscope Probe
Modulation Analyzer
Power Meter
Frequency Range: 0.01 to 22 GHz
Residual FM: <100 Hz
Must have auxiliary IF output when used
with the HP 8901A Modulation Analyzer.
Dual channel
X vs. Y display mode
Sensitivity: <O.1 uS/DIV
Horizontal Sweep Rate: <0.1 uS/DIV
Compatible with HP 8755C Swept Amph-
tude Analyzer and HP 8750A Storage-
Normalizer
Capable of transmission measurements
Power Resolution: <0.25 dB/DIV
Compatible with Swept Amplitude Analyzer
Frequency Range: 0.01 to 12.4 GHz
Power Range: —20 to +10 dBm
Frequency Range: 0.01 to 12.4 GHz
Output Port Tracking: 50.25 dB
Maximum Input Power: 2+20 dBm
Compatible with Display Mainframe and
Swept Amplitude Analyzer
Accuracy: =0.005%
Input Impedance: 210 MQ
Frequency Mode
Frequency Range: =30 kHz
Frequency Resolution: <10 Hz
Time Period Mode
Frequency Range: 220 kHz
Resolution: <50 us
1: I General Purpose Probe
(May be used in addition to Spectrum
Analyzer)
Frequency Range: Must cover auxiliary IF
Output frequency of Spectrum Analyzer
used
Residual FM: <10 Hz
Power Range: —20 to +10 dBm
(No substitution when used for external |
power meter leveling).
HP 8565A
HP 1740A
HP 1821, 180TR
HP 87550
HP 11664A
HP 11667A
HP 8750A
HP 3455A
HP 5328A
HP 10008B
HP 8901A
HP 432A
PT
AT
General Information
Table 1-4. Recommended Test Equipment! (2 of 4)
Model 8350A
instrument
Critical Specifications
Recommended Model
Use”
Thermistor Sensor
Frequency Counter
Directional Coupler
Directional Coupler
RMS Voltmeter
Function Generator
Crystal Detector
Air Line Extension
(2 required)
RF Cable
Step Attenuator
Frequency Range: 0.01 to 12.4 GHz
Maximum SWR: <1.75
Frequency Range: 0.01 to 12.4 GHz
Sensitivity: <—20 dBm |
Maximum Input Power: =0 dBm
Frequency Accuracy: <1 kHz
Frequency Range: 0.1 to 2.0 GHz
Nominal Coupling: 220 dB
Maximum Coupling Variation: <1 dB
Minimum Directivity: 232 db
Frequency Range: 2 to 12.4 GHz
Mean Output Coupling: =20 dB
Output Coupling Variation: =:1 dB
Minimum Directivity: 226 dB
dB Range: —20 to ~70 dBm
(0 dBm = | mW into 600 Ohms)
Frequency Range: 10 Hz to 10 MHz
Accuracy: +3% of full scale
Frequency Range: 0.1 Hz to 10 MHz
Output Level: 10V p-p into 50 Ohms
Output Level Flatness:
<-£3% from 10 Hz to 100 kHz
<10% from 100 kHz to 10 MHz
Frequency Response: 0.01 to 12.4 GHz
Maximum Input Power: 2100 mW
Impedance: 50 Ohms
Frequency Range: dc to 12.4 GHz
Reflection Coefficient:
0.018 + 0.001 (times the frequency in
GHz)
impedance: 50 Ohms
Length: 61 cm (24 in.)
Frequency Range: de to 12.4 GHz
Incremental Attenuation:
0 to 70 dB in 10 dB steps
Calibration Accuracy: <+0.1 dB atalisteps
HP 8478B
HP 5343A
HP 778D
HP 779D
HP 3400A
HP 3312A
HP 4238
HP 11567A
HP 111708
HP 8495A Option 890
PT
Model 8350A
General Information
Table 1-4. Recommended Test Equipment! (3 of 4)
Instrument Critical Specifications Recommended Model Use”
Attenuator Attenuation: 3 dB + 0.5 dB HP 8491B Option 003 P
Frequency Range: 0.01 to 12.4 GHz
Maximum Input Power: =+20 dBm
Attenuator Attenuation: 6 dB + 0.5 dB HP 8491B Option 006 P
Frequency Range: 0.01 to 12.4 GHz
Maximum Input Power: 2-420 dBm
Attenuator Attenuation: 10 + 0.5 dB HP 8491B Option 010 P
Frequency Range: 0.01 to 12.4 GHz
Maximum Input Power: =-+20 dBm
Attenuator Attenuation: 20 + 0.5 dB HP 8491B Option 020 P
Frequency Range: 0.01 to 12.4 GHz
Maximum Input Power: 2+20 dBm
Adjustable Short Frequency Range: 1.8 to 12.4 GHz Maury Microwave’ P
Impedance: 50 == 1.5 Ohms 1953-2
Adjustable AC Line | Select to cover line voltage used
Transformer 100-120 volt General Radio* P
WSMTB
220—240 volt General Radio P
WIOHM73
Line Voltage Monitor | To be used with above Adjustable AC Line
Transformers
120 volt Monitor RCA>120B P
240 volt Monitor RCA WV 503A P
Frequency Meters Frequency Accuracy: <0.17%
Calibration Increments: <2 MHz
Select to cover Frequency range of
RF plug-in
0.96 to 42 GHz HP 536A P
3.7 to 12.4 GHz HP 537A P
Adapter APC-7 to Type N(m) HP 11525A P
Adapter APC-3.5(f) to Type N(m) Amphenol® P
131-7018
Delay Line Refer to Figure 1-3 P
Discriminator
1-13
General Information
Model 8350A
Table 1-4. Recommended Test Equipment! (4 of 4)
Instrument
Critical Specifications
Recommended Model Use?
PC Board Extender’
Extender Cable Interface Connector (J3)
44-pin, extends printed circuit boards
RF Plug-in Extends RF Plug-in Interface
Extender Cable Connector (J2)
RF Plug-in Extends RF Plug-in Power Supply
HP Part Number T
08350-60031 (each)
HP Part Number T
08350-60034
HP Part Number T
08350-60035
plug-ins.
IRefer to the Recommended Test Equipment list in the Operating and Service Manual of the RF plug-in used fora listing of
equipment specifically relating to the RF plug-in used. Not all equipment included in this list is necessary for all RF
2p=Performance Test: A=Adjustments; T=Troubleshooting
3Mauray Microwave Corp., 8610 Helms Ave., Cucamonga, CA 91730
General Radio, 300 Baker Avenue., Concord, MA 01742
SRCA Distribution & Special Products Div, Dept. EM, New Holland Ave., Lancaster, PA 17604
6 Amphenol North America, Bunker-Ramo Corp, RF Operations, 33 E. Franklin St, Danbury, CT 06810
Two 44-pin printed circuit board extenders and a fuse kit are included with the Model 8350A Accessory Kit Supplied (HIP
Part Number 08350-60020). Refer to Figure 1-1 in this manual.
1-72. RECOMMENDED TEST
EQUIPMENT
1-73. Equipment required for testing and adjust-
ment of the instrument is listed in Table 1-4. Other
equipment may be substituted if it meets or
exceeds the critical specifications indicated in the
table.
1-74. HEWLETT-PACKARD INTERFACE
BUS. (HP-1B)
1-75. The Model 8350A is factory equipped with
a remote programming interface using the
Hewiett-Packard Interface Bus (HP-IB). This
provides a remote operator with the same control
of the instrument available to a manual (local)
operator. Remote control is maintained by a
system controller (desktop computer, computer,
etc.) that sends commands or instructions to and
receives data from the Model 8350A using the HP-
IB. The HP-IB is Hewlett-Packards implemen-
tation of the IEEE Standard 488-1978. A complete
general description of the HP-IB is provided in the
manual entitied “Condensed Description of the
Hewiett-Packard Interface Bus” (HP Part Num-
ber 59401-90030.
Model 8350A
General Information
Item Description HP Part Number
À Power Splitter HP 11667A
2 Adapter: Type N Male to SMA Female (2 required) 1250-1250
3 Delay Line: >1 meter (3 feet) in length, SMA male 08350-20038
connectors
4 Adapter: BNC Female to Male SMA 1250-1200
5 Mixer: Double Balanced
1 to 12 GHz:
RHG Electronics Part No. DM 1-12 0960-0451
1 to 18 GHz:
RHG Electronics Part No. DM 1-18 None
RHG Electronics Laboratories, Inc.
Deer Park, NY 11729
6 Adapter: SMA Male to SMA Male 1250-1159
Figure 1-3. Delay Line Discriminator
1-15/1-16
Model 8350A
Installation
SECTION Il
INSTALLATIO
2-1. INTRODUCTION
2-2. This section provides installation instruc-
tions for the Model 8350A Sweep Oscillator and its
acccessories. This section also includes infor-
mation about initial inspection and damage
claims, preparation for use, and packaging,
storage, and shipment.
2-3. INITIAL INSPECTION
2-4. Inspect the shipping contamer for damage.
If the shipping container or cushioning material is
damaged, it should be kept until the contents of
the shipment have been checked for completeness
and the instrument has been checked mechani-
cally and electrically. The contents of the ship-
ment should be as shown in Figure 1-1. Pro-
cedures for checking electrical performance are
given in Section IV, Performance Tests, of this
manual. If the instrument combination does not
pass the electrical Performance Tests, refer to
Section Y, Adjustments, of this manual. If, after
the adjustments have been made, the instrument
combination still fails to meet specifications, refer
to Section V, Adjustments, of the Operating and
Service Manual for the RF plug-in being used. If a
circuit malfunction is suspected, refer to trouble-
shooting procedures in Section VIII, Service, of
this or the RF plug-in manual If the instrument
does not pass the above electrical tests, if the
shipment contents are incomplete, or if there is
mechanical damage or defect, notify the nearest
Hewlett-Packard office. If the shipping container
is damaged, or if the cushioning material shows
signs of stress, notify the carrier as well as the
Hewlett-Packard office. Keep the shipping
materials for carrier's inspection. The HP office
will arrange for repair or replacement without
waiting for claim settlement.
2-5. PREPARATION FOR USE
2-6. Power Requirements
2-7. The Model 8350A Sweep Oscillator requires
a power source of 100, 120, 220, or 240 Vac, +5% to
—10%, 50 to 60 Hz, single-phase (50 to 400 Hz,
single-phase for Option 400 instruments). Power
consumption is approximately 270 volt-amps,
depending upon the specific RF plug-in unit used.
2-8. Line Voltage and Fuse Selection
2-9. Figure 2-1 illustrates the line voltage selec-
tion card and fuse location in the Power Line
Module on the rear panel of the Model 8350A.
Select the line voltage and fuse as follows:
a. Measure the ac line voltage.
b. Refer to Figure 2-1. At the instrument rear
panel power line module, select the line
voltage (100, 120, 200, or 220 volts) closest to
the voltage you measured in step a. Note the
available line voltage must be within +5% or
— 10% of the line voltage selection as shown
in Table 2-1. If it 1s not, you must use an
autotransformer between the power source
and the Model 8350A.
Table 2-1. Line Voltage/Fuse Selection
Measured PC Selector Fuse/
ac Line Voltage | Board Position | HP Part Number
90 to 105 volts 100 > 10.055
108 to 126 volts 120 я ; 5.0055
198 to 231 volts 220 я : 3.0007
216 to 252 volts 240 я - 3000
го
por
Installation
c. Make sure the correct fuse is installed in the
fuse holder. The required fuse rating for each
line voltage is indicated in Table 2-1 and
below the power line module on the rear
panel of the Model 83504.
Pr A da PE
} CAUTION }
Oe. am a a gw aw aie dw rh pie ge ale Jr ai Jin, JK
To prevent damage to the instrument,
make the correct line voltage and fuse
selection before connecting line power to
the instrument.
2-10. Power Cable
2-11. In accordance with international safety
standards, this instrument is equipped with a
three-wire power cable. When connected to an
appropriate power line outlet, this cable grounds
the instrument cabinet. Table 2-2 shows the styles
of plugs available on power cables supplied with
HP instruments. The HP Part Numbers for the
plugs are part numbers for the complete power
Model 8350A
cables. The type of power cable/plug shinped with
the instrument depends upon the country of
destination.
| WARNING |
Before switching on this instrument, be
sure that only the specified power cable is
used. The instrument is provided with a
three-wire power cord which grounds the
instrument cabinet. This power cord
should only be inserted in a socket outlet
provided with a protective earth contact.
This protective action should not be
negated by the use of an extension cord
{power cable) without a protective con-
ductor (ground). Grounding one conduc-
tor of a two-conductor outiet is not suf-
ficient protection.
2-12. The offset pin of the three-prong connector
is the grounding pin. When operating the Model
8350A from a two-contact outlet, the protective
grounding feature may be preserved by using a
three-prong to two-prong adapter (USA connec-
tors only, HP Part Number i251-0048) and
connecting the green wire ofthe adapter to ground.
RECEPTACLE FOR PRIMARY POWER CORD
PC SELECTOR BOARD SHOWN POSITIONED “eo
FOR 115/120 VAC POWER LINE, Ce
SELECTION OF OPERATING VOLTAGE
SLIDE OPEN POWER MODULE COVER DSOR
ANG PULL FUSE-PULL LEVER TG LEFT 70
REMOVE FUSE,
PULL DUT VOGLTAGE-SELECTOR PC BOARD,
POSITION PC SDARD SO THAT VOLTAGE
NEAREST ACTUAL LINE VOLTAGE LEVEL
WILL APPEAR IN MODULE WINDOW. PUSH
BOARD BACK INTO ITS SLOT,
3. PUSH FUSE-PULL LEVER INTG ITS NORMAL
RIGHT-HAND POSITION.
4, CHECK FUSE TO MAKE SURE ITIS OF COR-
RECT RATING AND TYPE FOR INPUT AC
LINE VOLTAGE. FUSE RATINGS FOR DIF-
FERENT LINE VOLTAGES ARE INDICATED
BELOW POWER MODULE,
5 INSERT CORRECT FUSE IN FUSEHOLDER.
Figure 2-1. Power Line Module
Model 8350A Installation
Table 2-2. AC Power Cables Available
Cable С PI Cable
ug Cable For Use
Plug Type HP Part D Description Length Color in Country
Number (inches)
250V 8120-1351 0 Straight *BS1363A 90 Mint Gray United Kingdom,
8120-1703 | 6 | 90° 90 Mint Gray | Cyprus, Nigeria,
e Rhodesia,
Singapore
L MN
CE CJ]
8120-1369 |0 Straight *NZSS198/ASC112 79 Gray Austrailia,
8120-0696 | 4 90° 87 Gray New Zealand
8120-1689 | 7 Straight *CEE7-Y11 79 Mint Gray Fast and West
8120-1692 | 2 | 90° 79 Mint Gray | Europe, Saudi
Arabia, Egypt
So. Africa, India
{unpolarized in
many nations)
8120-1348 |5 Straight *NEMAS-15P 80 Black United States,
8120-1398 | 5 90° 80 Black Canada,
o 8120-1754 |7 | Straight*NEMAS-15P 36 Black | Japan (100V or
Е 8120-1378 i Straight *NEMAS-15P 80 Jade Gray 200V3,
8120-1521 |6 | 90° 80 Jade Gray — | Mexico,
ni e 8120-1676 |2 | Straight*NEMAS-15P 36 Jade Gray | Philippines,
| Taiwan
250V 8120-2104 | 3 Straight *SEVIO11 79 Gray Switzeriand
1959-24507
Type 12
e
LO О ON
E
8120-0698 | 6 Straight *NEMAG6-1 5P United States,
Canada
8120-1957 | 2 Straight*DHCK 107 79 Gray Denmark
8120-2956 | 3 | 90° 79 Gray
8120-1860 6 Straight *CEE22-VI
(Systems Cabinet
use)
*Part number shown for plug is industry identifier for plug only. Number shown for cable is HP Part Number for
complete cable including plug.
В = Earth Ground; L = Line; N = Neutral
2-3
installation
2-13. HP-1B Address Selection
| WARNING Î
The HP-IB address switch is set with the
top cover removed from the Model
83504 and should be set only by a skilled
person who is aware of the hazard in
volved. Prior то setting the HP-18B address
switch, the LINE switch should be set to
OFF and the power cord should be dis-
connected from the ac power source for
maximum safety. Capacitors inside the
instrument may still be charged even
when the instrument is disconnected
from its ac power source. Use caution
when setting the HP-IB address switch to
avoid touching assemblies or compon-
ents within the instrument other than the
HP-IB address switch,
2-14. When the Model 8350A is used under
remote control with the HP-1B, the controller on
the bus refers to the Model 8350A by an HP-IB
“address”. The Model 8350A is differentiated from
any other instrument on the bus by its own unique
address. This HP-1B address is initially preset in
Model 8350A
the Model 8350A by a 5-segment address switch
ARS], located on the AS HP-IB Interface assem-
bly, as shown in Figure 2-2. A diagram of A8S1 is
given in Figure 2-3. Each of the 5 switches corres-
ponds to one of the digits of the 5-digit binary
equivalent of the address, as shown in Table 2-3.
ASS] switch Al corresponds to the Least Signifi-
cant Bit (LSB) of the binary address and switch AS
corresponds to the Most Significant Bit. The HP-
IB address can be modified by a front panel
SHIFT function.
2-15. Thirty-one different address codes are
available (decimal 0 to 30). The Model 8350A is
shipped from the factory preset to binary address
“10011” (decimal 19}, as shown in Figure 2-3. In all
standard Model 8350A instruments, the HP-IB
address will be read by the processor from the HP-
IB address switch A8S1 upon initial power on
only, This HP-IB address will remain in effect
until the address is changed by modifying the
A8S1 switch pattern (and turning the LINE switch
OFF and ON) or by resetting the address through
tne front panel SHIFT LOCAL function. The HP-
IB address can be read directly from the front
panel by pressing SHIFT LCL. The current HP-
IB address 1s then displayed in decimal form on
the FREQUENCY/TIME display. If the HP-IB
ABS1
HP-13
"ADDRESS
SWITCH
Figure 2-2. Location of A&S] HP-IB Address Switch
2-4
Model 8350A
address must be changed from that which is
displayed, enter the new decimal equivalent of the
desired HP-IB address and press GHz to termi-
nate the entry. The FREQUENCY/TIME display
should now display the new HP-IB address. This
address Will remain in effect until the Model
8350A LINE switch is turned OFF, When the
instrument LINE switch is set to ON once again,
the HP-IB address will revert back to the ASSI
address switch setting. An INSTRUMENT
PRESET command will not modify the current
HP-IB address setting,
2-16. Option 001 Model 8350A instruments
contain a battery supported memory and a special
A3 Microprocessor board. The battery option
allows the instrument memory to retain the
assigned HP-IB address when the instrument is
turned off, regardless of the A8S1 address switch
setting. Upon initial power on, the HP-IB address
will need to be set to the desired code through the
front panel SHIFT LOCAL function. The address
will be retained as long as the battery is charged to
a sufficient level. Refer to the Battery Operation
(Option 001) paragraph in this section of the
manual further information on Option 001
instruments.
2-17, HP-IB address labels are available by
installation
ordering HP Part Number 7120-6853 (each). (See
Figure 2-4). These labels allow easy reference to
the HP-IB address of each system component.
HP Part No. 7120 -— 8863
Figure 2-4. HP-IB Address Label
2-18. 11869A Switch Settings for HP
86200 Series RF Plug-ins
2-19. The identification switch on the Model
11869 RF Plug-in Adapter must be preset when
using the adapter with HP 86200 Series RF Plug-
ins in the Model 8350A. The setting of the
identification switch is interrogated at power on,
when the 8350A INSTR PRESET button is
pressed, or when an HP-IB Instrument Preset
А851
LOGIC"
(OPEN}
A m rte
toward
rear of
8350A
a 5 LOGIC "0"
(GROUND)
Al A2 АЗ
(LSB)
Ad Ab
(MSB)
Figure 2-3. ASS] HP-IB Address Switch
Installation
Model 8350A
Table 2-3, HP-IB Address Codes
Address Characters A8S1 Address Switch Settings Address
, {MSB) (LSB) Decimal
Listen Talk A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 Equivalent
SP @ 0 0 0 0 O 0
! A O 0 0 О i 1
> B О 0 0 1 0 |
# С 0 О 0 i 1 3
$ D 0 0 Î 0 0 4
% E 0 0 i 0 I 5
& Е 0 0 i 1 О 6
’ G 0 0 i ] | 7
( H 0 1 0 0 0 8
) 1 0 1 0 0 1 9
* J 0 Î 0 i O 10
+ K 0 i 0 i 1 11
, L 0 i i G 0 12
- M 0 1 1 О 1 13
N 0 1 1 1 0 14
/ O О I Î i | 15
0 P 1 0 О 0 O 16
1 Q i 0 0 0 i 17
2 R i 0 0 ] 0 18
3 S i 0 0 1 1 19
4 T ] O I 0 О 20
5 U 1 0 Î 0 Î 21
6 V 1 0 i i 0 22
7 W 1 0 i 1 i 23
8 x i 1 0 0 0 24
9 Y 1 2 0 0 O 25
Z i } 0 i 0 26
; [ 1 1 0 1 1 27
< / 1 i 1 0 1 28
= ] 1 1 1 0 1 29
> A ! 1 1 1 0 30
(“IP”) command is received. If the identification
switch is set incorrectly, the START/STOP fre-
quencies will be in error. Refer to Section II,
Installation, of the Model 11869A Operating and
Service Manual for instructions to properly set the
identification switch.
2-20. Internal Square Wave Modulation
Frequency Selection
2-21. Internal square wave modulation 1s avail-
able "at all sweep speeds on the Model 8350A.
Internal square wave modulation is selected by
the front panel „Г? МОР pushbutton. Modu-
2-6
lation frequency is selectable by an internal
jumper to be either 27.8 kHz (preset at the factory
for use with Model 8755 Swept Amplitude
Analyzer systems) or 1 kHz. Refer to Section V
Adjustments in this manual for detailed 1nfor-
mation on how to select and adjust the internal
square wave modulation frequency.
2-22. RF Plug-in Configuration Switch
2-23. Each RF plug-in may have a configuration
switch which must be preset prior to operation in
the Model 8350A. This is a multiple switch with
individual switches that correspond to various RF
Model 8350A
Installation
ОНТ
LDIO2
10103
LD104
LED
LDAV
LNRFD
LNDAC
LIFC
LSRO
LATN
SHIELD
(CONNECTED TO
EARTH GROUND)
Wu
HP-1B Logic Levels:
14
15
16
17
18
19
22
23
NOSSO ER NOU DWN
N No wd
E © o
True (low) State <0.8 Vde; Faíse (high) State >+2.4 Vde,
21
= TNR
HP-1B CONNECTOR J4
(as viewed from rear of instrument)
LDIOS
LDI06
hy
LDIOS
LREN
P/O TWISTED PAIR WITH 6 |
P/O TWISTED PAIR WITH 7
P/O TWISTED PAIR WITH 9
P/O TWISTED PAIR WITH 11 |
SIGNAL GROUND.
| GROUNDED NEAR
» | TERMINATION
PIO TWISTED PAIR WITH 8 | CET UE WIRE
| OF TWISTED
| PAIR
P/O TWISTED PAIR WITH 10 |
MNEMONICS TABLE
Mnemonic Description
|| АТК LOW = Attention control line
L DAV LOW = Data Valid Control line
L DIO! thru 8 LOW = Data Input/Output lines
I. EOI LOW = End Or Identify control line
L IFC LOW = Interface Clear control line
L NDAC LOW = Data Not Accepted control line
|| NRFD LOW = Not Ready For Data control line
L REN LOW = Remote Enable control line
I. SRQ LOW = Service Request contro! line
Figure 2-5. HP-IB Connector Signals and Pin Configuration
2-7
Installation
plug-in functions such as FM sensitivity selection,
FM input coupling selection {direct coupled or
cross-over), RF power level at instrument power
on, and Option 002 Step Attenuator operation.
Refer to the Operating and Service Manual of the
specific RF plug-in used for detailed information
on the configuration switch.
2-24. interconnections
2-25. Thereare two RF plug-in interconnections
on the Model 8350A Sweep Oscillator mainframe.
These are the RF Plug-in Interface Connector (J2)
and the Power Supply Interface Connector (J3). J2
and J3 are visible at the rear of the RF plug-in
channel. A complete listing of pins and the
associated signals and voltages for these con-
nectors are listed on the overall instrument Wiring
List in Section VIII Service, of this manual.
2-26. Mating Connectors
2-27. All of the externally mounted connectors
on the Model 8350A are listed in Table 2-4.
Opposite each mainframe connector is an 1n-
dustry identification, the HP part number of a
mating connector, and the part number of an
alternate source for the mating connector. For HP
part numbers of the externally mounted con-
nectors themselves, refer to Section VI, Replace-
able Parts, of this manual.
Model 8350A
2-28.
Cables
HP-IB Interface Connector and
2-29. The HP-IB Interface Connector J4, located
on the rear panel of the Model 8350A, allows the
sweep oscillator to be connected to any other device
on the HP-IB Interface Bus. A complete illustra-
tion of pin configuration and signals on the HP-IB
Interface connector 1s given in Figure 2-5.
2-30. All instruments on the HP-IB Interface
Bus are interconnected by HP-IB Interface
Cables. A list of the available HP-IB Interface
Cables and their part numbers is given in Figure 2-
6. As many as 15 instruments can be connected in
parallel on the HP-IB Interface Bus. To achieve
design performance on the bus, proper voltage
levels and timing relationships must be main-
tained. If the system cable is too long or if the
accumulated cable length between instruments is
too long, the data and control lines cannot be
driven properly and the system may fail to
perform. Therefore, the following restrictions
must be observed:
a. With two instruments in a system, the cable
length must not exceed 4 meters (12 feet).
b. When more than two instruments are con-
nected on the bus, the cable length to each
instrument must not exceed 2 meters (6 feet)
per unit.
c. The total cable length between all units
cannot exceed 20 meters (65 feet).
HP-IB Cable
Part Numbers Lengths
HP 10833A Im (33 ft)
HP 10833B 2m (6.6 ft.)
HP 10833C 4 m (13.2ft.)
HP 10833D 0.5 m (1.6 ft.)
Figure 2-6. HP-IB Interface Cables Available
2-8
Model 8350A Installation
Table 2-4, Model 83504 Mating Connectors
8350A Connector Mating Connector
Connector Name Industry Identification HP Part Number Alternate Source
J1 SWEEP QUTPUT/ BNC 1251-0256 Specialty Connector
SWEEP INPUT 25-P118-1
(front panel)
J4 HP-IB INTERFACE BUS* 24-Pin Micro Ribbon 1251-0293 Amphenol
57-30240
15 POS Z BLANK BNC 1250-0256 Specialty Connector
25-P118-1
J6 NEG Z BLANK BNC 1250-0256 Specialty Connector
25-P118-1
J7 PEN LIFT BNC 1250-0256 Specialty Connector
25-P118-1
J8 SWEEP OUT/IN BNC 1250-0256 Speciality Connector
(rear panel) 25-P118-1
J9 CNTR TRIG BNC 1250-0256 Specialty Connector
25-P118-1
J10 STOP SWEEP BNC 1250-0256 Specialty Connector
25-P118-1
J11 FM INPUT BNC 1250-0256 Specialty Connector
25-P118-1
J12 AM INPUT BNC 1250-0256 Specialty Connector
25-P118-1
113 PROGRAMMING 25-Pin D Series 1251-0063 ITT Cannon
CONNECTOR DBM-25P
14 ALT SWP Audio 3-Pin Connector no HP Part Number Switchcraft
INTERFACE ** TA-3F
*Refer to Figure 2-6 for HP-IB Interface Cable information. HP-IB Interface connector J4 signals and pin configuration
are given in Figure 2-5,
** A 1219 mm (48”) cable assembly with a Switchcraft TA-3F Audio 3-Pin connector on each end is supplied with the
Model 8755C Swept Amplitude Analyzer as the Alternate Sweep Interface Cable. The complete cable may be ordered
separately as HP Part Number 8120-3174,
2-9
Installation
2-31. Programming Connector
2-32. The Programming Connector J13 on the
rear panel of the Model 8350A provides digital
control of display functions and sweep oscillator
Step Up control. Figure 2-7 gives a description of
all pins and signals available on the Programming
Connector. When the Model 8410B/8411A Net-
work Analyzer 1s used with the Model 8350A, the
Model 8410B Source Control Cable (HP Part
Number 08410—60146) connects the Model 8410B
rear panel SOURCE CONTROL and the Model
8350A rear panel PROGRAMMING CON-
NECTOR. Additionally, the sweep oscillator RF
plug-in 1V/GHz output connects to the Model
84108 rear panel FREQ REF INPUT to insure
that the Model 8410B phase locks with the sweep
oscillator properly when sweeping octave or
multi-octave bands. The Model 8410B Source
Control Cable connector pins and signals are
illustrated in Table 1-3 of this manual.
2-33. Operating Environment
2-34. Temperature. The instrument may be
operated in temperatures from 0°C to +55°C.
2-35. Humidity. The instrument may be
operated in environments with humidity from 5%
to 80% relative at +25°C to +40°C. However, the
instrument should also be protected from temper-
ature extremes which cause condensation within
the instrument.
2-36. Altitude. The instrument may be
operated at altitudes up to 4572 meters (approxi-
mately 15,000 feet).
2-37. Cooling. Clearances for ventilation
should be atleast 10 cm (4 inches) at the rear of the
cabinet and 7.6 cm (3 inches) at the sides. The
clearances provided by the plastic feet in bench
stacking and the filler strips in rack mounting are
adequate for the top and bottom cabinet surfaces.
A diagram illustrating the path for cooling airflow
generated by the rear panel fan is given in Figure
2-8. Insure that the air intake and exhaust venting
holes are not obstructed within the limits shown in
Figure 2-8.
2-38. RF Plug-in Installation
2-39. To operate as a completely functional
sweep oscillator, the Model 8350A Sweep Oscil-
2-10
Model 8350A
lator must have an RF plug-in unit installed. To
install an HP 86200 Series RF plug-in (coupled to
a Model 11869A RF Plug-in Adapter) in the
Model 8350A, refer to Section II, Installation, in
the Model 11869A Operating and Service Manual.
To install an HP 83500 Series RF plug-in unit into
the Model 8350A mainframe:
a. Set the Model 8350A mainframe LINE
switch to OFF,
b. Remove all connectors and accessories from
the front and rear panel connectors to
prevent them from being damaged.
c. Position the RF plug-in unit latching handle
in the fully raised position. The latching
handle should spring easily into the raised
position and be held by spring tension.
d. Insure that the mainframe RF plug-in
channel is clear, align the RF unit in the
channel and slide it carefully into place
towards the rear of the channel. It should
slide easily without binding.
e. The drawerlatch handle slot will engage with
the locking pin just before the RF plug-in is
fully seated in position.
f. Press the latch handle downward, while still
pushing in on the RF plug-in, until the
drawer latch is fully closed and the front
panel of the RF plug-in 1s aligned with the
mainframe front panel.
2-40. Bench Operation
2-41. The instrument cabinet has plastic feet and
a foldaway tilt stand for convenience in bench
operation. The tilt stand inclines the instrument
for ease of operating the front panel controls and
to allow the RF plug-in to be removed easier. The
plastic feet provide clearance for air circulation
and make the instrument self-aligning when
stacked on other Hewlett-Packard full rack-width
modularinstruments. The instrument is packaged
at the factory with two shipping bars attached to
the front sides (refer to Figure 2-12). If the instru-
ment does not include front handle or rack mount
options, replace the shipping bars with the self-
adhesive trim strips supplied with the instrument.
Model 8350A
Installation
PROGRAMMING CONNECTOR 413
(as seen from rear panel)
O
и
"10 O Ha
210 O ls
3 O O 16
4 | ©
G 17
510 .
Logic Levels:* 6 | O © 118 Control of input fines can
O |e be accomplished by contact
Low <0.8 Vdc 710 O |20 closure to ground for a
High >2.4 Vdc 81 O legic low level and open
910 O [21 circuit for a logic high level.
19| О О |2
O 123
1 3 O las
12
lO O 125
NT
O
Pin Mnemonic Description in/Gut
1 NO CONNECTION
2 L MP LOW = MARKER PULSE OUTPUT
3 I. PLRQ LOW = PENLIFT REQUEST INPUT
4 ALTI ALTERNATE SWEEP | OUTPUT
5 1. SFSRQ LOW = STOP FORWARD SWEEP REQUEST INPUT
6 +5VA +5 VOLTS (100 ma MAX) OUTPUT
7 L RFB LOW = RF BLANK OUTPUT
8 I. RF BRQ LOW = RF BLANK REQUEST INPUT
9 EXT TRG HIGH = EXTERNAL TRIGGER SWEEP INPUT
10 PL HIGH = PENLIFT OUTPUT*
11 L MUTE LOW = PEN MUTE FOR X-Y RECORDER OUTPUT
12 NO CONNECTION
13 NO CONNECTION
14 1. BPI LOW = BLANKING PULSE 1 OUTPUT
15 I. MRKQ LOW = MARKER REQUEST INPUT
16 L RTS LOW = RETRACE STROBE OUTPUT
17 L ALTE LOW = ALTERNATE SWEEP ENABLE OUTPUT
18 L SSRQ LOW = STOP SWEEP REQUEST INPUT
19 GND DIG DIGITAL GROUND
20 I. BPRQ LOW = BLANKING PULSE REQUEST INPUT
21 L CNTR LOW = COUNTER TRIGGER OUTPUT
22 L STPADV LOW = STEP ADVANCE INPUT
23 L PL LOW = PENLIFT OUTPUT
24 SYNC TRG HIGH = SYNCHRONIZING TRIGGER OUTPUT
25 NO CONNECTION
* OPEN COLLECTOR OUTPUT
Figure 2-7. Programming Connector Signals and Pin Configuration
2-11
Model 8350A
Installation
Additional Option 907 Kits may be crdered as HP
Part Number 5061-0089.
Front Handles {Option 807)
2-42.
Rack Mounting (Option 908)
2-44.
PEE EEE EU
EA GN al о,
CAUTION $
isla ale ae ab le PE AD eB af
a al a
lil hal a Ея
Ea y
When installing front handies and rack
th Option 908 contain a
1
Rack Mount Kit. This kit supplies the necessary
instruments w
2-45
F
that the correct screws
mount kits, insure
tallation figures in this
Use of a
is
specified in the
tion instructions for prepar-
talla
Ins
+
ardware and
h
are used,
r
section of the manual
Amt À =
o Вы wn
TA ©
+ on 7
Años a
ESE -
Tam «Г
о pi, © >
LA “ =
= 2 +
a ++ CO ©
ово ul
= 20.
© LE £
- 7 5 =
= ов
e $
O Aa En
ET ou r
ou + — № НЫЕ
our ses €
+ A a Ce &
= ЕАО 7
adam ©
EOS <
© OFA
3 с В АЗ + <=
В ооо © © © Le
ATAR D CO
=SecE ED
ve o 5
EIA 48
ео Ня > A
E Ñ
=ES<LA ao
© a
as
N о
о % ® 28g
©
Ве 5e.
£55 955
9 м т ©
® © ‚о д ZE
Во + om E
® в ее = EN a ©
© OS
A: „25
es. Б ar
о Е < 0 нов @
4 o e O 2.5
e =
© = 2 ос
DE gw ла 29 5
ое % © Fao
250 87%
ов = © SS
„= a © i) =
2æt£ € m
285 SLU
SECC ETE
o y +» о
зн ОЕ со
2 DES “Ls
SEE … E
a 8} - Cm
SSH
TE a
en Ms 2
on the instrument. Instal-
two front handles
ing
+
th Option 909 contain a
Instruments wi
+
2-47
2-9.
igure
F
+
in
Iso given
+
1018 are a
truct
ion 1ns
lat
10 CM.
4 IN.
Keep this
area ciear
AS
7
A
N
FA
NN
A
Ss Em
A
me
a
i
se
Fae
e
hon
E
ca
ir
ne
iyi
ПОЙ,
Te
Fe
AE
E
Mei,
eos
E
Do
Ta
o
E
Ta
e.
pi
HEA
hy
El
N
7.6 CM
3 IN,
11
<
£3
«С
Keep this
area clear
Figure 2-8. Model 83504 Ventilation Clearances and Airflow
2-12
Model 8350A
Installation
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS:
1. REMOVE SIDE TRIM STRIPS (1).
2. ATTACH FRONT HANDLE ASSEMBLY (2) WITH THREE 8-32 x 3/8 SCREWS (3) PER SIDE.
3. PRESS FRONT HANDLE TRIM (4) IN PLACE.
OPTION 907 (HP Part No. 5660-0089) CONTENTS
item Qty. HP Part No. с Description
2 2 5060-9899 6 Front Handle Assembly
3 6 2510-0195 9 #8-32 x 3/8 Screw
4 2 5020-8896 7 Front Handle Trim
Figure 2-9. Option 907 Front Handles Kit
2-13
Installation
Model 8350A
1. REMOVE SIDE TRIM STRIPS (1).
2. ATTACH RACK MOUNT FLANGE (2) WITH 8-32 x 3/8 SCREWS (3) .
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS:
3. REMOVE FEET AND TILT STANDS (4) BEFORE BACK MOUNTING. THIS ALSO REMOVES IN-
FORMATION CARD TRAY (5) . TO RETAIN USE OF INFORMATION CARDS, DO NOT REMOVE
FEET, AND WHEN RACK MOUNTING, ALLOW APPROXIMATELY 20M (3/4 INCH) BELOW IN-
STRUMENT TO ACCOMODATE THE TRAY. (NO FILLER STRIP IS PROVIDED.)
OPTION 908 (HP Part No. 5061-0077) CONTENTS
item
Oty. HP Part No.
с
О
Description
5020-8862
6 2510-0913
2
=
Rack Mount Flange
#8-32 x 3/8 Screw
2-14
Figure 2-10. Option 908 Rack Mount Kit
Model 8350A
Installation
1. REMOVE SIDE TRIM STRIPS (D
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS:
2. ATTACH RACK MOUNT FLANGE © AND FRONT HANDLE ASSEMBLY (3) WITH THREE
8-32 x 5/8 SCREWS (4) PER SIDE.
3. REMOVE FEET AND TILT STANDS (5) BEFORE RACK MOUNTING. THIS ALSO REMOVES
INFORMATION CARD TRAY (5) . TO RETAIN USE OF INFORMATION CAROS, DO NOT RE-
MOVE FEET, AND WHEN RACK MOUNTING, ALLOW APPROXIMATELY 20M (3/4 INCH) BELOW
INSTRUMENT TO ACCOMODATE THE TRAY, (NO FILLER STRIP 18 PROVIDED.)
OPTION 909 (HP Part No. 5061-0083) CONTENTS
Нет (ity. HP Part No. 5 Description
2 2 5020-8874 1 Rack Mount Flange
3 2 5060-9899 Front Handle Assembly
4 6 2510-0194 8 48-32 x 5/8 Screw
Figure 2-11. Option 909 Rack Mount Kit with Handles
2-15
Installation
Model 8350A
; т
{2 PLACES)
С .
Mem (ty HP Part No, 0 Description
i 8 9220-2733 7 FOAM PADS - TOP CORNERS; BOTTOM CORNERS
2 i 9211-3462 2 CARTON - INNER
3 2 4040-1738 3 BARS - SHIPPING, NYLON
4 4 2510-0103 9 SCREW - FOR ATTACHING SHIPPING BARS
5 1 9211-3463 3 CARTON - OUTER
6 2 9220-3365 3 SIDE PADS - CORRUGATED CARDBOARD
7 i 9220-2950 0 SLEEVE - FOR MANUAL PROTECTION
8 i 0222-0484 5 POLY BAG - TO COVER INSTRUMENT (NOT SHOWN)
Figure 2-12. Packaging for Shipment using Factory Packaging Materials
Model 8350A Installation
1. REMOVE RACK MOUNT FLANGE (3) AND/OR FRONT HANDLE ASSEMBLY. DO,
9 ATTACH SHIPPING BARS*(D) WITH TWO 8-32 x 3/8 SCREWS ©.
*Refer to Figure 2-12 for Part Numbers of Shipping Bars and Screws.
Figure 2-13. Preparation of Instrument for Shipment
2-17
Installation
Rack Mount Kit with Front Handles, a combi-
nation of the Option 907 Kit and the Option 908
Kit. This kit supplies the necessary hardware and
installation instructions for preparing the instru-
ment to mount on equipment rack with 482.6 mm
(19 in.) support spacing, with the addition of
front handles. Installation instructions are also
given in Figure 2-11. Additional Option 909 Kits
may be ordered as HP Part Number 5061-0033.
Battery Operation (Option 001)
2-49. Instruments with Option 001 contain a
battery pack (inserted in the battery holder with a
battery hold down clamp) and a modified A3
Microprocessor board. With Option 001 installed,
the instrument has a nonvolatile memory which
retains the contents of all instrument state storage
registers, the currentinstrument state, and the HP-
IB address. When shipped from the factory, the
batteries are fully charged. The batteries will
retain a sufficient charge to hold the memory
contents for approximately 20 days from the date
at which they were fully charged. The batteries are
charged within the instrument, and a full charge is
maintained at all times when the instrument
LINE switch remains ON. The batteries do not
charge when the instrument LINE switch 15 OFF.
When fully discharged, the batteries will typically
take approximately 33 hours to obtain a full
charge. Allow the instrument to be on for at least
24 hours when new or when the instrument has
been turned off for a sufficiently long enough
period of time that the batteries might have
become discharged to a level where memory
contents may have been lost. Additional Option
001 Battery Kits may be ordered for the Model
8350A to upgrade a standard instrument to an
Option 001 instrument by ordering HP Part
Number 08350-60013. This Option 001 Battery Kit
contains a battery pack, a battery pack hold down
ciamp, and a special A3 Microprocessor board.
All other necessary wiring and hardware con-
nections have been made at the factory on all
standard instruments. Refer to Section VI Re-
placeable Parts in this manual for information
and part numbers required to order individual
battery packs.
2-50. STORAGE AND SHIPMENT
2-81. Environment
2-52. The instrument may be stored or shipped
in environments within the following limits:
2-18
Model 8350A
Temperature. ...... —40°С to +75°C
Humidity.... 5% to 95% relative at 0°
to +40°C
Altitude. ........ Up to 15240 meters
(approximately 50,000 feet)
2-53. The instrument should also be protected
from temperature extremes which may cause
condensation in the instrument.
2-54. Packaging
2-55. Original Packaging. Containers and
materials identical to those used in factory pack-
aging are available through Hewlett-Packard
offices. A complete diagram and listing of pack-
aging materials used for the Model 8350A 1s
shown in Figure 2-12. Prior to shipping in the
factory packaging materials, the shipping bars
should replace the front handles or rack mount
flanges, as shown in Figure 2-13, to hold the
instrument securely in the packaging material. If
the instrument is being returned to Hewlett
Packard for servicing, attach a tag indicating the
type of service required, return address, model
number, and full serial number (located on rear
panel serial plate). Mark the container FRAGILE
to assure careful handling. In any corres-
pondence, refer to the instrument by model
number and full serial number.
2-56. Other Packaging. The following
general instructions should be used for repack-
aging with commercially available packaging
materials:
a Wrap the instrument in heavy paper or
plastic. If shipping to a Hewlett-Packard
Office or Service Center, attach a tag indi-
cating the type of service required, return
address, model number, and full serial
number.
b. Use a strong shipping container.
с. Use enough shock-absorbing material
around all sides of the instrument to provide
a firm cushion and to prevent movement
inside the container. Protect the control
panel with cardboard.
d. Seal the shipping container securely.
e. Mark the shipping container FRAGILE to
- assure careful handling.
f In any correspondence, refer to the instru-
ment by model number and full serial
number.
Model 8350A
SECTION II
OPERATION
The Operation section of this manual consists of
the following three subsections:
1.
OPERATING INFORMATION: This
subsection contains indexed functional
blocks which provide complete (local and
remote) information on the use of the 8350A
Sweep Oscillator by function. Also contained
in this subsection is Operator's Maintenance,
Local, and Remote Operators checks.
LOCAL OPERATION: This subsection
provides Local (non-HP-IB) operating infor-
mation arranged by function. This subsec-
tion also contains information on localiy
interfacing with the following test equipment:
e HP 87558 Frequency Response Test Set
e HP 8410B Network Analyzer
® HP 7010B and other X-Y Recorders
e HP 5343A Frequency Counter
PROGRAMMING NOTES: Programming
Notes are individual publications documenting
Operation
the HP-IB use of the sweep oscillator. The
following programming notes are included
in this section:
®
®
Introductory Operating Guide for use
with the HP 9825A/B.
Introductory Operating Guide for use
with the HP 9835A.
Introductory Operating Guide for use
with the HP 9845A.
Introductory Operating Guide for use
with the HP 85A.
Quick Reference Guide.
Contact your local sales office for copies of other
Programming Notes as they become available.
This section also includes a blue service tag page.
If sweep oscillator service is required, remove one
of the tags and fill in as much information as
possible. Attach this tag to the sweep oscillator to
aid in servicing and reduce turn-around time.
3-1
8350A
— SWEEP
OSCILLATOR
STATE ÉNTAF
008
HEE ATA Lema
HEWLETT
PACKARD
© Copyright
8350A
SWEEP OSCILLATOR
HEWLETT-PACKARD COMPANY
1980
1400 FOUNTAIN GROVE PARKWAY, SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA 95404
MANUAL PART NO. 08350-90001
Microfiche Part No. 08356-90002
Printed: AUGUST 1980
E
HEWLETT
PACKARD
Model 8350A
Operating Information
SECTION li
OPERATING INFORMATION
3-1. INTRODUCTION
3-2. This subsection contains a index of keys and
functions which refer to the figured functional
blocks at the end of this subsection. Included in
this section are descriptions of all front panel
controls connectors and indicators, operator's
checks, operating instructions, and operator's
maintenance.
3-3. SAFETY
3-4. Before appplying power, refer to SAFETY
CONSIDERATIONS in Section I of this manual.
3-5. The information, cautions, and warnings in
this manual must be followed to ensure safe
operation and to keep the insturment safe.
| WARNING |
Before the instrument is switched on, all
protective earth terminals, extension
cords, auto-transformers and devices
connected to it should be connected to a
protective earth grounded socket. Any
interruption of the protective earth
grounding will cause a potential shock
hazard that could result in personal injury.
Only fuses with the required rated current
and specified type should be used. Do not
use repaired fuses or short circuited
fuseholder. To do so could cause a shock
or fire hazard.
AAA AAA AAA SAA
ARACENA
$ $
; к
4‘ "
CAU [ON $
4 y у
% >
E +
a Ash
AILS
ar
Before the instrument is switched on, it
must be set to the voltage of the power
source, or damage to the instrument may
result.
3-6. OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
3-7. Table 3-1 briefly summarizes the major
operating characteristics of the Sweep Oscillator.
The table 1s not intended to be an in-depth listing
of all operations and ranges. For more infor-
mation on Sweep Oscillator capabilities, refer to
Specifications Table 1-1, and Supplemental Infor-
mation Table 1-2.
3-8. Panel Features
3-9. Figure 3-1 Front Panel features provides a
reference to a functional block figure number
which provides a complete description of each
control within the function block.
0. Rear Panel features are described in Figure
3-10.
3-2.
3-11. OPERATOR'S CHECKS
3-12. The local operators check (Figure 3-3)
allows the operator to make a quick check of the
main instrument functions prior to use. This
check assumes that an RF plug-in is installed in
the Sweep Oscillator and that a 10 dB attenuator,
oscilloscope, and appropriate crystal detector are
available. If these items are not available the
preliminary self test may still be performed.
3-13. The remote operator's check (Figure 3-4)
allows the operator to make a quick check to the
main remote functions prior to use. This test is
shown In program statements for HPL and
BASIC and a general flow chart.
3-14. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
3-15. Located underneath the Sweep Oscillator
1s a pullout information card which contains
information on general operating instructions,
some remote programming information, and
some plug-in usage information.
3-16. For a complete reference of each function
refer to the function group index (Table 3-2).
3-17. LOCAL OPERATION
3-18. The operation of the 8350A Sweep oscil-
lator in the Local mode is described in the Local
Operation handbook and by functional biock
figures indexed in the table of contents and Table
3-2, В
1
Operating Information Model 8350A
FRONT PANEL FEATURES
FREQUENCY DATA ENTRY POWER Level
Markers/Sweep See Figure 3-11, Control Crystal MARKERS
FREQUENCY TIME — Marker See Figure 3-13. {83522A and
Sweep Modes Transfer Storage Registers 53525A)
See Figure 36. See Figure 3-8, See Figure 3-9, See Figure 3-16,
wie Ese
* y PA
{3 po Ss
CL) С) =
dy
PT y prin,
a {5 ES
ДАМ
LINE INSTRUMENT Madulation/ Pull Out Card ALC MODE
This switch STATE Blanking Provides brief See Figure 3-15,
controls power See Figure 3-7. See Figure 3-12 summary of
to Sweep Oscii- SWEEP TRIG- | Sweep Oscillator Signal Control
lator and instat- GE R/SWEEP controls and See Figure 3-14,
led Plug-in, See Figure 3-10, functions.
Figure 3-1. Front Panel Features
Model 8350A
Operating Information
REAR PANEL FEATURES
KE
SER AAA TEA,
Eee EDI UA
Plug-in connectors {as apply)
1V/GHz Frequency Reference output connector
provides approximately 1V (DC) per GHZ of sweep
signal output.
SWEEP OQUT/IN connector parallels front panel
SWEEP OUT/IN connector. Provides and accepts
sweep signal,
FM INPUT connector passes signal thru to plug-in
for frequency modulation or phase-lock error signal
inputs.
PROGRAMMING CONNECTOR provides digital
control of external display functions and sweeper
EXT MKR (1V RMS MAX) (on 83522A and я control,
83525A only) input connector allows use of external и , ,
markers when plug-in front panel EXT MARKER Pin Description in/out — Logic
FREQ button is engaged. 1
2 Marker Pulses output TTL —
SQUAREWAVE INPUT connector provides input 3 Pen Lift Request input- TTL—
connector for external pulse or squarewave modu- 4 Sweep Alternate output TTL —
lation (8755 compatability). 5 Stop Fwd Swp Req. input TTL —
EXT ALC and RF OUTPUT, These connectors re- 6 +5 volts output: TIL—
place the corresponding front panel connectors in (100 ma Max)
Option 004 plug-ins. 7 RF Blanking output TTL--
SERIAL PLATE and Option label. 8 RF Blank Request input TTL —
9 Ext Trig Input input I'TL +
HP INTERFACE ‘BUS input/output connector 10 Pen Lift output *
allows interface with other HP-IB instrument or 11 Recorder Mute output TTL —
controllers. 12
POS 7 BLANK output connector provides positive 13
(+5V) retrace and bandswitch blanking and nega- 14 Blanking Puise output TTL —
tive intensity Marker Z-axis Modulation signals for 15 Marker Request input TTL —
external display. 16 Retrace output TTL —
CNTR TRIG. Counter trigger output connector 17 Alternate Swp En output TIL—
when used with STOP SWEEP with appropriate 18 Stop Swp Request input TTL —
frequency counter (SWP INTFC B) to stop the for- 19 Digital Ground in/out
ward sweep long enough to take a frequency count. 20 Blk Pulse Request input TTL
NEG 7 BLANK output connector provides retrace 21 Counter trigger output TTL —
(-5V) and bandswiteh blanking Z-axis modulation 22 Step Up Advance input I'TL —
signals for external displays. 23 Inverse Penlift output TTL —
_ | 24 8410 Ext Trigger output TTL +
PEN LIFT output connector provides an open col- 25 a —
lector output to the remote penlift coil of an X-Y
recorder. 7 ALT SWP INTERFACE connector may be connected
to the 8755C ALT SWP INTERFACE connector
via cable HP Part No. 8120-3174 to provide Alter-
nate Sweep Function.
*Open collector (+4 volts de 40 ma)
Figure 3-2. Rear Panel Features
Operating Information Model 8350A
Table 3-1, Sweep Oscillator Operating Characteristics
FREQUENCY RANGE Set automatically when plug-in installed
START-STOP
CENTER FREQUENCY-AF
SWEEP MODES Marker->Center frequency
Marker Sweep
CW Frequency
MARKERS 5 settable frequency markers
amplitude and intensity
SWEEP TIME Range 01-100 seconds
POWER Control power level with 83500 Series Plug-ins
Table 3-2. Functional Block Index (I of 2)
Function Function Block Index Page
ALC Mode ALC Mode... co sa aa ra aan ae 41
ALL OFF Frequency Markers... .............. a ta ea anne 26
Alternate Sweep Storage Registers. ........ iii, 30
Amplitude Mkr Plug-in Crystal Markers. ............. oo as. 43
Amplitude Markers 8350A Modulation/Blanking. .............. 2... 36
Back Space Pata Entry ...... ereeeeerererreaodrre. 34
Blanking Display | Modulation/Blanking. ......................... | 36
Modulation/Blanking RF Modulation/Blanking. . ........................ 36
Center Frequency Frequency Sweep Mode... ...................... 21
Crystal Markers Crystal Markers. ........ 0. 43
CW Mode Frequency Sweep Mode. ....................... 21
CW Filter Signal Control... eee 40
Data Entry Data Entry «ooo ER eee 34
dB—dBm Data Entry... oo. aaa. 34
Delta A Frequency Frequency Sweep Mode. ....................... 21
Display Blanking Modulation/Blanking. ......................... 36
Down & step Data Entry .. oo 4 ee na a Le ra a aa 34
External ÂLC ALC Mode... a aa aa a 41
External Sweep Sweep/Sweep Trigger ..............02.0 0 ara. 32
External Plug-in Markers Crystal Markers... ...................... ...... 43
Frequency Sweep Modes Frequency Sweep Mode. ....................... 21
Frequency Markers 8350A Frequency Markers... ......................... 26
Frequency Markers Plug-in Crystal Markers. .......... iii, 43
GHz Pata Entry... eeeerer ea a 34
HP-IB Only Functions HP-IB Special Functions ...................... 45
Instrument Preset Instrument State .............................. 24
Intensity Crystal Markers Crystal Markers... ................... ........ 43
Model 8350A
Operating Information
Table 3-2. Functional Block Index (2 of 2)
Function Function Block Index Page
Intensity Markers 8350A Frequency Markers. ...... a 26
Internal ALC ALC Mode... eerea erro. 41
Internal Sweep Trigger Sweep/Sweep Trigger .. ............ 0 ae 32
Learn String HP-1B Only Functions. ....... aa 45
Level Power Power Control ................... ............ 38
Line Sweep Trigger Sweep/Sweep Trigger... e 32
Local key Instrument State ..................... ae 24
Manual Sweep Sweep/Sweep Trigger... oii... 32
M1 to M5 Frequency Markers. ....... .... 26
Markers Crystal Crystal Markers........ ao. 43
Marker Delta Frequency Markers. ............ LL. 26
Marker Sweep Frequency Markers. ........................... 26
Marker— Center Frequency Frequency Markers. ........................... 26
Meter ALC ALC Mode... ooo aa nee a a an 41
Miilisecond Data Entry ......... LA aa aa aa 34
MHz Data Entry ....... ane 34
Network Analyzer Trigger HP-IB Only functions ......................... 45
Offset Frequency Sweep Mode. ....................... 21
Output Active Parameter НР-1В Only Functions. . ....................... 45
Power Level Power Control ................................ 38
Power Sweep Power Control ................................ 38
Recall n Storage REgisters. ......... ., 30
RF Power Control ................................ 38
Save n Storage Registers. ............. ooo... 30
Shift Data Entry... eran nooo. 34
Single Sweep Trigger Sweep/Sweep Trigger... iLL. 32
Slope Power Control... eres nea. 38
Slope Cal Power Control ................... oir. 38
Square Wave LI] Modulation Blanking/Modulation. ......................... 36
Start Sweep Frequency Sweep Mode. ....................... 21
Step Size Data Entry... eneaaraneaoa 34
Stop Sweep Frequency Sweep Mode. ....................... 21
Time Sweep Frequency Markers. ........................... 26
UP Step key Data Entry ........ AA La aa ae ae 34
Vernier Frequency Sweep Mode. ....................... 21
Operating Information Model 8350A
LOCAL OPERATOR'S CHECKS
DESCRIPTION
The Preliminary check provides assurance that most of the internal functions of the Sweep
Oscillator are working. The main check provides a general check of the overall functions of the
Sweep Oscillator.
PRELIMINARY CHECK
(Self test) Each time the Sweep Oscillator is turned on or INSTR PRESET button is engaged the
instrument performs a series of self tests taking about one second to complete. When the self test
is complete the instrument will be in the preset mode if a plug-in is installed or the left-most
frequency display will have an E001 error code indicating no plug-in is installed. If error code
E016 is observed refer to paragraph 3-103. If another error code 1s noted the Sweep Oscillator
requires service refer to paragraph 3-107. Plug-in related error information (E050 to E059) is in
the plug-in manual.
l. Set LINE switch to ON. Observe display in START/STOP mode with display frequency
equaling plug-in range or E001 if no plug-in is installed.
MAIN CHECK
Equipment:
RF Plug-in ............ HP 83500 series or HP 86200 series with adapter HP 11869A
(18 GHz or less) a
Oscilloscope. «over eres reee arererc HP 1220A or HP 1740A |
Crystal Detector ..................... HP 8473C or a crystal detector that will cover
frequency range of interest.
Attenuator 10 dB... eccrrerie.rereeaa ae aa a ea 8491B Option 010
Cables BNC to BNC (3)... 20000 eaaoeace ea 10503A (123 cm)
Setup:
8350A SWEEP 83500
OSCILLATOR = SERIES PLUG-IN OSCILLOSCOPE
POS Z т Di
aan | BLANK Z AXIS | Г Зо 5 20 ©
e — | Poo o
RE OUTPUT Gr cos © - 3 © :
84736 la © enon” © o О © |
10 dB ATTENUATOR CRYSTAL XINPUTE — [INPUT
84915 OPT 010 DETECTOR
р-р
Connect the equipment listed above as shown in above diagram.
Figure 3-3. Local Operator's Check (1 of 2)
Model 8350A Operating Information
I.
LOCAL OPERATOR'S CHECKS (Cont'd)
PTE
USAR
¿ CAUTION :
BEFORE CONNECTING LINE POWER, ensure that ail devices connected
to this instrument are connected to the protective {earth} ground.
BEFORE SWITCHING ON THIS INSTRUMENT, ensure that the line
power plug is connected to a three-conductor line power outlet that has a
protective (earth) ground. {Grounding one conductor of a two-conductor
outlet is not sufficient.)
NOTE
BEFORE SWITCHING ON THIS INSTRUMENT, ensure that the power
transformer primary is matched to the available line voltage, the correct
fuse is installed, and the safety precautions are taken. See Power
Requirements, Line Voltage Selection, Power Cables, and associated
warnings and cautions in Section II.
Procedure;
Set LINE switch to ON position. Observe that LEDs above START and STOP buttons are
on with the frequency range of installed plug-in displayed above them. Oscilloscope trace
should show detected RF signal output below zero--volt reference with no discontinuities
in swept trace across band.
ow / button. Observe LED above CW on and trace is reduced to dotatcenter of CRT
CE button. Observe LED above CF and AF buttons on, that displayed center
frequency i is at center of plug-in frequency range and AF display 1s equal to frequency
span.
Press MI button. Observe button LED on an blinking and a intensity dot at
approximately the center of the trace.
Press SWEEP TIME button then press DATA ENTRY % button a few times and observe
sweep getting slower. Press DATA ENTRY # button a few times and observe sweep getting
faster.
Press DATA ENTRY s and observe FREQUENCY/TIME display is 0.100
SCC.
Figure 3-3. Local Operator’s Check (2 of 2)
Operating Information Model 8350A
REMOTE OPERATOR'S CHECK
Flowchart HPL Statements! BASIC Statements? Visual
indicators
Send REN command
to ensure instrument is
in remote enable state,
“DATA
Program sweep
oscillator to
Instrument Preset,
Print Start and Stop
frequencies.
Switch to CW,
Print CW.
{
Switch to CF AF.
Change sweep time
to 10 seconds.
"LOCAL
Switch to focal.
rem 7157
wrt 717, "TR
wet 719 "OPFrA'
red 717,6
wrt 717, ORFRAS"
red 717,8
pri "START FREQ" A
pri "STOP FREQ" E
wrt 719,"CHOPCy?
prt "си, С
wrt, “CFSTI0SC,"
lol 719
REMITE 719
QUTEUT 719; "IP"
OUTPUT 7419; "OPFA"
ENTER 719,8
OUTPUT 719; "OPFE"
ENTER 719;E
FRINT"START FREO";A
FRINT"STOP FREO":E
OUTPUT 719:"CHOPRCH"
ENTER 717;
FRINT*CW" CC
OUTPUT 719;"CFST10SC"
LOCAL 7197
Remote LED an
instrument
START/STOP
condition
preset sweep
Printout equals
plug-in
frequency range
CW LED on
printout
CW frequency
CF and AF,
TIME LEDS
on, 10 second
sweeptime
Remote
lamp out
I Typical Statements for the HP 9825 Series Desktop Computer.
2 Typical Statements for the HP 9835, 9845, and 85 Series Desktop Computers.
Figure 3-4, Remote Operator's Check
Model 8350A
3-19.
PACKARD INTERFACE BUS
3-20. The 8350A Sweep Oscillator can be oper-
ated remotely via the Hewlett-Packard Interface
Bus (HP-IB). Bus compatibility, programming
capability, and data formats are described 1n the
following paragraphs. For complete information
on specific program code syntax, functions, limits,
etc. please see Functional Block Index Table 3-2.
3-21. All front panel functions except for the
LINE switch and Set HP-IB Address are program-
mable through the HP-IB. Also provided are
special HP-IB only functions to aid the programmer.
Complete descriptions of all HP-IB programmable
functions are contained within the functional
blocks.
3-22. To verify thatthe Sweep Oscillator’'s HP-1B
interface is functional, a quick check is provided
in Figure 3-4 Remote Operators’ Check. This tests
that the 8350A can respond and send to the
controller the fundamental HP-IB bus messages.
The following information gives a general de-
REMOTE OPERATION: HEWLETT-
Operating Information
scription of the HP-IB and defines the terms,
concepts, and messages used in an HP-IB system.
3-23. For more information about the HP-IB,
refer to any of the following documents:
IEEE Interface Standard 488-1975
ANSI Interface Standard MC1.1
“Improving Measurements in Engineering
and Manufacturing” (HP Part No. 5952—0058)
“Condensed Description of the Hewlett
Packard Interface Bus” (HP Part No.
59401--90030)
3-24. General HP-IB Description
3-25. The HP-IB is a parallel bus of 16 active
signal lines grouped into three sets according to
function, to interconnect up to 15 instruments.
Figure 3-5 is a diagram of the interface connec-
tions and bus structure. Table 3-3 defines the
function of each signal line.
Table 3-3. The Bus Signals
Mame Nmemonic Description
Data Input/Output DIO1-8 The eight data lines for the byte of data,
Data Valid DAV Indicates the data lines have a valid byte of data,
Not Ready for Data NRED Indicates that the listening devices are not ready to accept
further data,
Not Data Accepted NDAC Indicates that the listening devices have not completely
accepted the present byte of data.
Attention ATN Enables a device to interpret data on the bus as a controller
command {command mode) or data transfer (data mode).
Interface Clear IFC Initializes the HP-IB system to an idle state (no activity on
the bus).
Service Request SRO Alerts the controller to a need for communication,
Remote Enable REN Places instruments under remote program control
End Or Identify EOI Indicates last data transmission during a data transfer
sequence; used with ATN to poll devices for their status.
Operating Information
3-26. Eight signal lines form the first set and are
termed “data” lines. The data lines carry coded
messages which reperesent addresses, program
data, measurements, and status bytes. The same
data lines are used for input and output messages
in bit-parallel, byte-serial form. Normally, a
seven-bit ASCII code represents each piece (byte)
of data, leaving the eighth bit available for parity
checking.
3-27. Data transfer 1s controlled by means of an
interlocked “handshake” technique which per-
mits data transfer (asynchronously) at the rate of
the slowest device participating in that particular
conversation. The three data byte transfer control
lines which implement the handshake (DAV,
NRFD, NDAC) form the second set of lines.
3-28. The remaining five general ‘interface
management lines form the third set and are used
in such ways as activating all the connected
devices at once, clearing the interface, allowing a
device to request service, etc.
3-23. Definition of HP-IB Terms and
Concepts
Model 8350A
3-30. The following list defines the terms and
concepts that describe HP-IB system operations.
Byte: A unit of information consisting of 8
binary digits (bits).
Device: Any unit that is compatible with the
IEEE Standard 488-1975.
Device Dependent: An action a device per-
forms in response to information sent on the HP-
IB. The action is characteristic of an individual
devices’ design and may vary from device to
device.
Addressing: The set of characters sent by a
controller to specify which device will send infor-
mation on the bus and which device(s) will receive
that information. A device may also have its
address fixed so that it may receive information
(listen only) or send information (talk only).
Polling: The process by which a controller can
identify a device that needs interaction with it. The
controller may poll devices for their operational
condition one at a time, which is termed a serial
poll, or as groups of devices simultaneously,
which is termed a parallel poll.
DEVICE A
Able 10 talk, lister,
sand control
1.0, Calculator]
DEVICE B
Able to talk and
Нее
tag, digiral voltmeter)
DEVICE C
Only able 10 listen
DEVICE D
Dniy able to talk
Data Bus
{8 signal fines)
Üata Byte Transfer
Control
(3 signal lines;
(HANDSHAKE) Línes
Genera! interface
Management (CONTROL) Lines
{5 signal Hoes)
ВЕН 1... 8
DAV
NAFD
NDAC
IFC
AFA
SRO
REM
EC
Figure 3-5, Interface Connections and Bus Structure
10
Model 8350A
3-31. Basic Device Communication
Capability
3-32. Devices which communicate along the
interface bus fall into three basic categories.
Talkers: Devices which send information on
the bus when they have been addressed.
Listeners: Devices which receive information
sent on the bus when they have been addressed.
Controllers: Devices that can specify the talker
and listener(s) for an information transfer. The
controlier can be an active controller or a system
controller. The active controller is defined as the
current controlling device on the bus. The system
controller can take control of the bus even if it is
not the active controller. Each system can have
only one system controller, even if several con-
trollers have system control capability.
3-33. HP-1B System Messages
3-34. The transfer of information vía the HP-IB
occurs from one device to one or more devices,
thus consider the information to be a message,
There are twelve types of messages on the HP-IB.
The following describes each of the HP-IB System —
Messages.
a. The Data Message: The actual infor-
mation which is sent from the talker to one or
more listeners on the HP-IB. The informa-
tion or data can be numeric or a string of
characters.
b. The Trigger Message: This causes the
listening device(s) to perform a device-
dependent action when addressed.
c. The Clear Message: This causes either
the listening device(s) or all of the devices on
the bus to return to a predefined device-
dependent state.
d The Remote Message: This causes the
listening device(s) to switch from locai front
panel control to remote program control
when addressed to listen. This message
remains in effect so that devices subse-
quently addressed to listen will go into
remote operation.
e The Local Message: This clears the
— remote message from listening device(s) and
returns the device(s) to local front panel
control.
Operating Information
{ The Local Lockout Message: This
prevents the user of a device from manually
inhibiting remote program control.
g The Clear Lockout/Set Local Message:
This causes all devices on the bus to be
removed from local lockout and revert to
local. This message also clears the remote
message for all devices on the bus.
h. The Require Service Message: A device
can send this message at any time to signify
that the device needs some type of interaction
with a controller. The message is cleared by
sending the device's Status Byte message if
the device no longer needs service.
i. The Status Byte Message: A byte that
represents the status of a single device on the
bus, Within this byte, the seventh most
significant bit (bit 6 of bits 0 through 7)
indicates whether the device has sent a
Require Service message. The remaining bits
indicate the present operational conditions
defined by the device. This byte is sent from a
talking device in response to a serial poll
operation performed by a controller.
] The Status Bit Message: A byte that
represents the operational conditions of a
group of devices on the bus. Each device
responds on a particular bit of the byte thus
identifying a device-dependent condition.
This bit is typically sent by devices in response
to a parallel poll operation by a controller.
К. The Pass Control Message: This trans-
fers the bus management responsibilities
from the active controller to another
controller.
l The Abort Message: The system con-
troller sends this message to unconditionally
assume control of the bus. This message
terminates all bus communications but does
not implement the Clear message.
This message can also be used by a controller
to specify the particular bit and logic level
that a device will respond with when a
parallel poll operation is performed. Thus
more than one device can respond on the
same bit.
A summary of the twelve bus messages, their
related commands and mnemonics are pro-
vided in Table 3-4.
11
Operating Information
Table 3-4. The Twelve Bus Messages (1 of 2)
Model 8350A
HP-1B
Message
Appli-
cable
83504
Response
Related
Comments
Interface
Function
Message
Type
Sample Statements
HPL
(9825)
BASIC
(9835,9845,85)
Data
Input data controls all front
panel functions (except the
Line switch) plus special HP-
IB only functions. Output data
includes information as to
present instrument state, values
of selected functions, and the
instrument status.
T6
ARI
SHI
Input Data
Tr +
wrt 719, …
OUTPUT 719,7...”
Output Data
red 719,A...
ENTER /719:A..
Trigger
Responds by triggering a
sweep if and only if in the
single sweep trigger mode.
GET
DH
System Trigger
trg 7
TRIGGER 7
Device Trigger
trg 719
TRIGGER 719
Ciear
Clears the instrument status
byte and the extended status
byte.
DCL
SPC
DCH
System Clear
clr 7
RESET 7
Device Clear
cir 719
CLEAR 719
Remote
Removes the 8350A from local
front panel control to remote
HP-IB control. All functions
remain the same as in local
and the keyboard is non-
responsive except the LOCAL
key.
RL}
System Remote
rem 7
REMOTE 7
Device Remote
rem 719
REMOTE 719
Local
Yes
Removes the 8350A from re-
mote HP-IB contro! to local
front panei control. Ali func-
tlons-remain the same as in the
remote state.
GTL
RL}
System Local
lel 7
LOCAL 7
Device Local
lei 719
LOCAL 719
Local
Lockout
Yes
Functions the same as the
remote message exceptthat he
entire front panel is disabled
including the LOCAL Key.
LLO
RL]
lio 7
LOCAL
LOCKOUT 7
Clear
Lockout/
Set Local
Yes .
Removes the 8350A from local
lockout and remote HP-IB
control to local front panel
control. All functions remain
the same as in the remote state.
RL]
Ici 7
LOCALE 7
Require
Service
The 8350A can set the HP-IB
SRO (Service Request) line if
one of the following instrument
conditions exists and has been
enabled by the Request Mask
value. Testable conditions 10-
clude: parameter value altered,
syntax error, end of sweep,
power failure, and RF un-
leveled.
SRQ
SKI
rds(719}— A,
if bit (6,A)
=1: to
“SRO”
STATUS
719: A IF
BIT (A6)=1
THEN Srq
12
Model 8350A
Operating Information
Table 3-4. The Twelve Bus Messages (2 of 2)
Sample Statements
HP-1B Appli- 8350A Related interface Message
Message cable Response Comments Function Type HPL BASIC
(9825) (9835,9845,85)
Responds to a Serial Poll with
one 8-bit byte with the seventh
most significant bit (bit 6 of
bits 0 through 7) set if the
8350A is Requesting Service. SPE STATUS 715; À
Status Yes Bit 2 indicates a status change SPD T6 rds(719)—A or A=5 POLL
Byte has occurred that can be de- (719)
tected only by analyzing the
extended status byte which is
accessible with the Output
Status function oniv.
Status The 8350A does not respond to
Bit No | a Paralell Poll PP9
- The 8350A does not have the
Pass No ability to take or pass control Co
Control of the HP-IB.
Responds by terminating ali | T6 _
Abort Yes | Listener or Talker functions. IFC L4 el / ABORT TO 7
3-35. HP-IB Addressing
3-36. Certain messages require that a specific
talker and listener be designated. Each instrument
on the bus has its own distinctive listen and/or talk
address which distinguishes it from other devices.
Devices can be listen only, talk only, and both
talker and listener.
3-37. Addressing usually takes the form of
“universal unlisten command, device talk address,
device(s) listen address(es)’. The universal un-
listen command removes all listeners from the
bus, thereby allowing only the listener(s) desig-
nated by the device(s) listen address(es) to receive
information. The information is sent by the talker
designated by the talk address. The system
controller may designate itself as either talker or
listener.
3-38. Table 3-5 lists all the possible talk and
listen addresses on the bus. The device address is
typically set via five binary bits which are the same
for both listen and talk addresses, with the sixth
and seventh bits used to determine when the
address 1s listen (bits are 0,1) or talk (bits are 1,0).
Some controllers distinguish between listen and
talk automatically, requiring only the 5-bit code
equivalent to designate a device.
3-39. 8350A HP-IB MESSAGE
RESPONSES
3-40. The 8350A responds to the twelve bus
messages as shown in Table 3-4.
3-41. 8350A HP-1B Compatibility.
3-42. Table 3-6 lists the 8350A Sweep Oscillators’
HP-IB capability, which are compatible with
IEEE Standard 488-1975.
13
Operating Information
Table 3-5. Possible HP-IP Addresses
Model 8350A
ASCH Characters Address Code Equivalent
Listen Talk (Binary) Decimal
Address Address 54321 Vaiue
SP @ 00000 00
! A 00001 Ol
7 B 0001090 02
# С O 0011 03
$ D 00100 04
% E 00101 05
& F 00110 06
’ G 00111 07
{ H 01600 08
) I 010601 09
* J 01010 10
+ K C1011 11
L 01100 12
- M 01101 13
. N 011190 14
/ O 01111 15
0 P 10000 16
1 Q 10001 17
2 R 10010 18
3 S 10011 19
4 T 10100 20
5 U 10101 21
6 V 10110 22
7 W 10 111 23
8 X 11000 24
9 Y 11001 25
: Z 11010 26
; { 11011 27
< \ 11100 28
= | 1110] 29
> + 11110 30
fable 3-6. 8350A Interface Functions
Code Function
SHI Source handshake capability
AHI Acceptor handshake capability
T6 Basic talker; Serial Poll; Unaddress to talk if addressed to listen
LA Basic listener; Unaddressed to listen if addressed to talk
SRI Service Request capability
RL1 Remote; Local capability
PPO No Parallel Poll capability
DCI Device clear capability
DT! Device trigger capability
co No controller capability
El Open collector bus drivers
14
Model 8350A
3-43. Compatible Universal and Addressed
HP-IB Commands.
3-44. The 8350A will respond to the following
universal and addressed commands, which are
sent in the command modes (ATN true).
Mnemonic Command ASCH Code
Universal:
DCL Device Clear DC4
LLO Local Lockout DCI
MLA My Listen Address (selectable)
MTA My Talk Address (selectable)
SPD Serial Poll Disable EM
SPE Serial Poll Enable CAN
UNL Unlisten ?
UNT Untaik —
Addressed:
GET Group Execute Trigger BS
GTL Go to Local SOH
SDC Selected Device Clear ВОТ
3-45. Remote Mode.
3-46. Remote Capability. The 8350A commu-
nicates on the bus in both remote and local modes.
In remote, its front panel controls are disabled
except the LINE switch and LCL key. The 8350A
can be addressed to listen or talk. When addressed
to listen, the 8350A will automatically stop talking
and respond to the following bus messages: Data,
Trigger, Clear, Remote, Local, Local Lockout,
Clear Lockout/Set Local, and Abort. When
addressed to talk, the 8350A will automatically
stop listening and send one of the following
messages: Data, Require Service, or Status Byte.
3-47. Displays. The REM light is on when the
8350A 1s in the remote mode. The ADRS D light1s
on when the 8350A is currently addressed to talk
or listen. All other displays function the same asin
local front panel control. |
3-48. Local-to-Remote Change. The 8350A
switches to remote upon receipt of the two part
Remote message. The two parts of the Remote
message are:
Remote Enable (REN)
Addressed to Listen (MLA)
Operating Information
3-49. The Sweep Oscillators output signal and
all control settings remain unchanged with the -
local-to-remote transition.
3-50. Local Mode.
3-51. Local Capability. In local, the 8350A can
send a Require Service message, send a Status
Byte, and respond to the Remote message.
NOTE
The 8350Á can respond to all HP-1B
messages except the Data Message
while in local. However, most of these
messages would not normally be used in
the local mode,
3-52. Remote-to-Local Change. The 8350A
returns to local contro! upon receipt of the Local
or Clear Lockout/ Set Local message. It can also
be set to local by pressing the front panel LCL key
(assuming that local lockout 1s not in effect). The
Sweep Oscillator’s output signal and all control
settings remain unchanged with the remote-to-
local transition.
3-53. Local Lockout. When a data transmission
is interrupted, which can happen by returning the
8350A to local with the front panel LCL key, the
data could be lost. This would leave the 8350A in
an unknown state. To prevent this, a local lockout
is recommended to disable the LCL key. Local
lockout remains in effect until the 8350A 1s returned
to the local state by either turning the LINE switch
off/on or by programming the Local Message.
3-54. 8350AÀ Address Assignment
Information.
3-55. The 8350A has a primary address that 1s
determined by an internal storage register. The
register 1s initialized upon power turn on by
reading the address bits AS through Al from
switches located on the 8350A A8 HP-IB Assembly.
Note that these switches are factory preset to
decimal 19 (Listen address of “37, Talk address of
“S”). The 8350A HP-IB address can be dynami-
cally changed from the front panel in local mode
by executing the “Set HP-IB Address” function
(Shift Local).
The present 8350A HP-IB address can be found
by pressing the SHIFT followed by the LCL key.
15
Operating Information
3-56. The decimal equivalent of the talk/listen
address will be displayed in the FREQUENCY/
TIME display. Refer to Table 3-5 for interpre-
tation of the equivalent decimal value into separate
talk and listen address characters. To change the
address refer to Figure 3-7 “Instrument State” for
further information.
3-57. Receiving The Data Message
3-58. The 8350A accepts program codes that
contain information for programming all of the
front panel and special HP-IB only functions
(except the LINE switch). The 8350A will respond
to the Data message when in remote and
addressed to listen.
3-59. Input Syntax. The 8350A responds fo
program codes 1n a Data message in the order in
which they are received. Each function is pro-
grammed with a string of ASCII coded characters
that follow one of the following sequences:
[Function Code] [Numeric Value] [Units
Terminator] [EOS]
[Function Code] [Numeric Value] [EOS]
[Function Code] [EOS]
3-60. Function Codes. Function codes are
typically 2 to 4 character mnemonics. For func-
tions that have a numeric value associated with it,
passing the function code only will enable and
activate the function for further data entry.
3-61. Numeric Value. These are either a single
decimal digit, a set of 14 characters or less
representing a number, or a string of binary bytes.
If the numeric value is a single digit (0 through 9),
it represents a storage register. A string of 14
characters maximum can be expressed in expo-
nential, decimal, or integer form. Acceptible
numeric formats are referenced in further sections
by the following format syntax:
Exponential +d *¥**q d***E+dd
Decimal dF ERG dF Fd
Integer +d***d
Single Digit d
Binary String b***b
Binary Byte b
16
Model 8350A
Where the character d' indicates a leading or
trailing zero, a space, or a numeric digit (0 through
9). The Characters “*** indicate a variable
number of the previous characters. The character
'b' indicates an $-bit binary byte. Numeric values
that are not binary in nature are scaled by the
appropriate units terminator.
3-62. Units Terminator. These are 2 character
codes that terminate and scale the associated
numeric value. Frequency values can be entered
in GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz. Sweep time values can
be entered in Seconds or milliseconds. Power
values can be entered in dBm or dB. If a units
terminator 1s not passed, the 8350A assumes the
numeric value is in the fundamental units of Hz or
Seconds.
3-63. End Of String Message (EOS). This can
be the ASCII character Line Feed (LF, decimal
10), the bus END command (EOI and ATN true),
or another function code string.
NOTE
The HP-IB program code syntax typically
mirrors that of the local front panel
keystroke sequence,
3-64. Valid Characters. The alpha program
codes can be either upper or lower case since the
8350A can accept either type. Spaces, unnecessary
signs (+,—), leading zeroes, and carriage returns
(CR) are ignored.
3-65. Program Codes. See Table 3-7 for the
summary of input programming codes that are
acceptible via the Data message.
3-66. Sending The Data Message.
3-67. The 8350A can send Data messages when
in remote and addressed to talk. The available
output modes are:
Learn String
Micro Learn String
Mode String
Interrogate Function
Active Function
Status
Model 8350A
3-68. Each function 1s activated by the 8350A
receiving a Data message with the appropriate
function code (refer to Table 3-7). The Learn
String, Micro Learn String, Mode String, and
Status functions send a Data message consisting
of a string of 8-bit binary bytes terminated using
the bus END command (EOI and ATN true) with
the last byte. The Interrogate and Active func-
tions send a Data message consisting of a 14
character ASCII string representing the numeric
value and terminated with a Carriage Return/Line
Feed (CR/LF).
3-69. Binary Syntax. [b***b] [EOI]
3-70. Митенс Syntax [+d.dddddE—dd] [CRILF]
3-71. The character b' indicates an 8-bit binary
byte and ‘d’ indicates a decimal digit (0 through 9).
The Characters “*** indicate a variable number of
the previous characters. Note that the binary
output format could have bytes that could be
misinterpreted as Carriage Returns and/or Line
Feeds so the user should defeat the ASCII CR/LF
as a valid character string terminator.
3-72. Receiving The Trigger Message.
3-73. The 8350A responds to the Group Execute
Trigger (GET) command to the HP-IB bus select
code and a Selective Device Trigger to the 8350A
HP-IB address. The effect of the GET commandis
to trigger the sweep if presently in the External
Sweep Trigger mode only, otherwise no action is
taken. The response is as if a Data message
consisting of the Single Sweep Trigger (T4)
program code were transmitted.
3-74. Receiving The Clear Message
3-75. The 8350A responds to both Device Clear
(DCL) and Selective Device Clear (SDC) by
resetting all HP-1B handshake lines to the inactive
state. The effect 15 to remove the 8350A from any
Talker or Listener control functions. The 8350A
responds by clearing the Status Byte and the
Extended Status Byte.
3-76. Receiving The Remote Message.
3-77. The Remote message causes the 8350A to
switch to remote mode. It has two parts: 1) remote
enable and 2) address-to-listen. The Sweep
Oscillators output and all other controls do not
change with the local-to-remote transition.
Operating Information
3-78. The REM light turns on only when the
8350A is in remote mode and after receiving its
first Data Message. The ADRS’D light turns on
when the 8350A is addressed to talk or listen.
3-78. Receiving The Local Message.
3-80. The 8350A returns to front panel control
when it receives the Local message. Its output and
all other controls do not change with the remote-
to-local transition.
3-81. When the 8350A goes to local mode, the
front panel REM indicator turns off. However, the
ADRS'D indicator would still illuminate if the
8350A were addressed.
3-82. The local message is the means by which
the controller sends the Go To Local (GTL) bus
command. The front panel LCL key can also
return the 8350A to local mode. However, pressing
the LCL key might interrupt a Data message to the
8350A and this would leave the 8350A in a state
unkown to the controller. This situation could be
avoided by sending the Local Lockout message
which disables the LCL key.
3-83. Receiving The Local Lockout
Message.
3-84. After receiving the Local Lockout message,
the 8350A front panel LCL key is disabled in
addition to all the other front panel keys. With
local lockout in effect, the 8350A can be returned
to local only by the controller or by turning the
8350A front panel LINE switch off/on.
3-85. Receiving The Clear Lockout/ Set
Local Message.
3-86. The 8350A responds to the Clear Lockout/
Set Local message in the same way as to the Local
message. Hence it returns to local front panel
control. The 8350A need not be addressed to listen
to receive this message.
3-87. Sending The Request Service
Message.
3-88. The 8350A sends a Request Service
message (RQS) whenever one of the following
conditions exist and if ithas been preprogrammed
17
Operating Information
Model 8350A
Table 3-7. HP-IB Program Codes
Code Description Code Description
AKm Amplitude Marker On/Off MPm Marker 1-2 Sweep On/Off
ALmn Alternate Sweep On/Off MS Milliseconds
АЛ Internal Leveling MZ MHz
A2 External Crystal Leveling MO Marker Off
A3 External Power Meter Leveling M1 Marker #1
M2 Marker #2
BK Backspace M3 Marker #3
CAm Amplitude Crystal Marker On/Off M4 Marker #4
(83522/83525 Only) M5 Marker #5
CF Center Frequenc | |
Ст Intensity Crystal Marker On/Off NT Network Analyzer Trigger (84108)
(83522/83525 Only) OA Output Active Parameter
CW CW Frequency OL Output Learn String
C1 1 MHz Crystal Marker Frequency OM Output Mode String
(83522/83525 Only) OP Output Interrogated Parameter
C2 10 MHz Crystal Marker Frequency OS Output Status bytes
(83522/83525 Only) OX Output Micro Learn String
C3 50 MHz Crystal Marker Frequency pr Power Level
(83522/83525 Only) PSm Power Sweep On/Off
C4 External Crystal Marker Frequency
(83522/83525 Only) RCn Recall Register
RFm RF Power On/Off
DF Delta F Frequency Span RM Service Request Mask
DM dBm RPm RF Blanking On/Off
DN Step Down/Decrement RS Reset Sweep
DPm Display Blanking On/Off
DUM Display Update On/Off SC Seconds |
SF Frequency Step Size
E Exponent Power Of 10 SH Shift Function
FA Start Frequency Sim Siope On/Off
FB Stop Frequency SM Manual Sweep
Fim CW Filter In/Out SP Power Step Size
F1 —26 MHz/V FM 55 Step Size
F2 —6 MHz/V FM ST Sweep Time
CZ GHz SVn Save Register
SX external Sweep
HZ Hz
| TS Take Sweep
IL Input Learn String T1 Internal Sweep Trigger
|Р Instrument Preset T2 Line Sweep Trigger
IX Input Micro Learn String T3 External Sweep Trigger
KZ KHz T4 Single Sweep
MC Marker To Center Frequency UP Step Up/Increment
MDm Square Wave Amplitude Modula- VR CW Vernier
tion On/Off
MO Marker Off 0-9 + — Acceptable Numeric Data
NOTES
1. Program codes of the form “XXm” use m” to turn the function On or Off (T or 0), For the storage register
functions the “n” is 1 through 9.
2. The 8350A ignores spaces, plus signs, negative signs (except when valid) and any unexpected characters.
Program codes can be upper or lower case alpha characters,
18
Model 8350A
to send the message by the Service Request Mask
(RM) function:
Error in syntax
Parameter value modified to default value
Hardware failure
End of sweep
3-89. The 8350A can send a Require Service
message in either the local or remote mode.
Further information pertaining to the instrument
state can be obtained by conducting a Serial Poll
or by executing the Output Status function, both of
which access Status Byte information. The RQS
state and the bus SRQ line are cleared only by
executing a Serial Poll.
3-90. Sending The Status Byte Message.
3-91. After receiving a Serial Poli Enable com-
mand (SPE) and when addressed to talk, the
8350A responds by sending its Status Byte mes-
sage as indicated in Table 3-8. A second status byte
is available but must be accessed via the Output
Status function. When the seventh most signifi-
cant bit (bit 6, Request Service) of the Status Byte is
true (one), an SRQ has occurred. See Service
Request for the conditions causing a Service
Request. Bit 4 indicates whether a change has
occurred in the Extended Status Byte. If Bit 4 is
Operating Information
true, then the second status byte should be
accessed via the Output Status function to deter-
mine the cause of the status change. All other bits
indicate the present status of the noted function.
The bits are true (one} if and only if the associated
function/condition is true. To select an SRQ fora
particular set of circumstances, both Status Bytes
can be masked with the Service Request Mask
function. The mask for each byte 1s determined by
summing the decimal values of each selected
function/condition that is desired. The default
Service Request Mask Value is 00000000’, or
decimal 0. See Table 3-8 for decimal values of each
Status Byte bit. |
3-92. Sending The Status Bit Message.
3-93. The 8350A does not respond to the Parallel
Poll Enable (PPE) bus command and thus cannot
send a Status Bit message.
3-84. Receiving The Pass Control Message.
3-95. The 8350A does not have the ability to take
or pass control thus it cannot respond to the Pass
Control message.
3-36. Receiving The Abort Message.
3-97. The 8350A responds to the Abort message
(IFC true) by stopping all Talker or Listener
functions.
Table 3-8. Status Byte Information
STATUS BYTE (#1)
BIT # 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DECIMAL
VALUE 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
FUNCTION N/A REQUEST ISRQ on SRQ on N/A SRQ on N/A SRQ on
SERVICE Syntax End of Change in Numeric
(ROS) Error Sweep Extended Parameter
Status Byte Altered to
Default
Value
EXTENDED STATUS BYTE (#2)
BIT # 7 6 5 4 3 | 2 1 0
DECIMAL |
VALUE 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
FUNCTION | Airflow *RF Power N/A N/A N/A N/A Self Test
Failure Unieveled | Failure/on Failed
*Bit/ Functions not usabie with 86200 Series Plug-ins and 11869A Adapter.
19
Operating Information
3-98. OPERATOR'S MAINTENANCE
3-99. Operators maintenance consists of replac-
ing defective fuses, cleaning the air filter, and
cleaning the plug-in interface connectors. These
items are discused in the following paragraphs.
3-100. Fuses
3-101. There are twelve fuses in the 8350A. Only
the ac line fuse located at the back of the
instrument may be replaced by the Operator. The
value for the ac fuse is printed on the rear panel of
the instrument below the power module. The
value and HP part number for the ac fuse may be
found in Sections II (Instaliation) and IV
(Replaceable Parts).
| WARNING |
ror continued protection against fire
hazard, replace only with 250 V fuses of
the same current rating and type (normai
blow}.
3-102. To replace the ac fuse the Line switch
should be switched off then the ac line cord
removed from the power source and instrument.
With the line cord removed, access may be gained
to the fuse compartment. The fuse may be
removed by pulling the lever inside the fuse
compartment. The internal fuses should only be
replaced by a qualified service technician.
20
Model 8350A
| WARNING |
it is important that the following mainte-
nance procedures be executed to retain
the safety features which have been
designed into the instrument.
3-103. Aur Filter
3-104. The cooling fan located on the rear panel
has a metal filter attached which will require
periodic cleaning. Due to the variety of environ-
mental conditions the interval between cleanings
cannot be estimated. Error signal E016 indicates
reduced air flow through an increase in temper-
ature in the cooling system. When this error is
noted on display a clogged filter may be the
reason. To clean the filter refer to Section § of the
manual.
3-105.
3-106. If plug-ins are changed frequently and/or
the interconnectors are dirty the 8350A plug-in
interconnect connector may require cleaning to
avoid voltage losses (tune voltage).
3-107.
3-108. If the Sweep Oscillator requires service
and the operators maintenance is not sufficient
the instrument may be sent as per Section 2 to your
local HP service organization. Before sending the
instrument back, fill out and attach one of the blue
service tags. If a sweep oscillator error code is
noticed when a failure occurs, note that error code
in the failure symptoms/special control settings
section of the tag.
Plug-in Interconnect
Service Tag Information
Model 8350A
Operating Information
FREQUENCY Sweep Node
DESCRIPTION
This function block contains the keys to select one of the three desired modes (START/STOP,
CW, CF/AF) or a modification of the mode (VERNIER, OFFSET). The two displays provide a
visual display of the frequencies in the mode selected. The rotary control knobs provide a
variable control to change the frequency of the function selected.
PANEL LAYOUT
HE CREQUENCY M
(gw H.400 z |
Ry VERNER
&
|=)
FUNCTIONS/INDICATORS
START: Enables START/STOP mode and allows selection of the lower frequency limit of
sweep.
STOP: Enables START/STOP mode and allows selection of the upper frequency limit of
sweep.
CW: Enables single frequency (CW) mode and allows selection of the frequency.
Swept CW: Enables CW mode with full SWEEP OUTPUT voltage (0-10 volts).
CF: Enables center frequency/delta frequency mode and allows selection of the center
frequency.
AF: Enables center frequency/delta frequency mode and allows selection of the total
frequency span.
VERNIER: Provides high resolution adjustments to values of the effective sweep center and
CW frequencies. Range 1s 0.1 percent of plug-in frequency band.
OFFSET: Offset RF frequency by entered value. START/STOP, CF/AF, and CW displays do
not indicate the change. Light indicates non-zero OFFSET value.
#0: This lamp indicates when a non—zero frequency vernier or offset value is in effect. To
zero the vernier or offset, enter 0 MHz.
Figure 3-6. Frequency Sweep Mode (1 of 3)
21
Operating Information
LIMITATIONS/CONCERNS
1.
The range of frequencies input to mainframe is determined by the plug-in (will accept
values to 12% out of range).
CW resolution equals 4096 points per band (includes + 2% overange) exceptin VERNTER.
Example; using a 2 to 8.4 GHz plug-in, 1.6 MHz is the resolution. The display range is |
MHz to 99.99 GHz.
The order in which START/STOP or CFAF are entered is not important.
START frequency must be lower than STOP frequency. Entering a START frequency
greater than the STOP frequency causes the STOP frequency to equal the START
frequency. If the START frequency is greater than the STOP, then START equals the new
STOP frequency.
Lights except as noted indicate active values/function.
Frequency values entered do not change when mode is changed.
Sweep Out provides a 0 to 10 volt ramp for all sweeps with 0 volts corresponding to the
effective start frequency and 10 volts to the stop frequency. In CW mode the voltage out is
equal to the percent of band (except swept CW).
Vernier value can “roll over” if knob or step causes the vernier value to exceed the
maximum value then the CW/CF value is changed and the vernier value reset to 0 MHz (or
appropriate value).
22
Figure 3-6. Frequency Sweep Mode (2 of 3)
Model 8350A
Model 8350A | Operating Information
LOCAL FUNCTION PROCEDURES:
Function Activate Data Forms Range and
On/Off | Knoh | Step | Keyboard Resolution
й Start x x x
requency
_ Stop X X X
Frequency |
Continuous x X X Range: |
Wave See plug-in
Swept CW A X Resolution:
Center X x x +0.24%
Frequency of band
Delta x x
Frequency
Offset X X
Range: 1.05%
of plug-in
Vernier X X X ,
Resolution:
+.0008% of band
! Values must end with terminator (GHz or MHz),
REMOTE FUNCTION PROCEDURES:
Program Code
Mode Function ; т
| Suffix Scale Resolution Range Resolution
Start FA Plug-in 10.24%
START/STOP
Stop FB
CW CW 9
CW GZ X10
Swept CW SH CW MZ х10°
3
Center Frequency CH KZ xo
CF/AF HZ Xi
Deita Frequency DF
OFFSET Frequency Ofíset SH VR
| 10.05% ;
VERNIER Frequency Vernier VR of band | +.0008%
! Depends on plug-in used: 1 KHz if <2 GHz in 83523 or 83522.
Figure 3-6. Frequency Sweep Mode (3 of 3)
23
Operating Information Model 8350A
INSTRUMENT STATE
DESCRIPTION
This function block contains two LEDs one that indicates whether Sweep Oscillator is in the
remote mode, and another indictates when it 1s addressed to talk or listen. The local key when
not in local lockout will switch the Sweep Oscillator from remote to local (front panel) control.
The Instrument Preset key when engaged will first run the Sweep Oscillator self test then set the
controls to the preset condition.
PANEL LAYOUT
INSTRUMENT STATE
REM ADAS'D oe
FUNCTIONS/INDICATORS
LCL: Returns Sweep Oscillator control to front panel from remote operation uniess a Local
Lockout has been executed. The 8350A retains the same control settings when switched from
remote to local.
Select HP-IB Address: Provides away to see and change the current HP-IP address code (0
to 30). The code 1s displayed in the FREQUENCY/TIME display.
INSTR PRESET: The following two steps take place when instrument preset is engaged or the
sweep oscillator is switched on. Plug-in related error (E050 to E059) information is found in
the plug-in manual.
|. À self test of the entire instrument 1s begun that takes approximately 1% seconds to
complete. If an error 1s found the test stops and an error code is displayed. Section 8 has a
list of error codes and failures.
2. After self test the sweep oscillator presets the controls as follows:
SWEEP MODE: START/STOP, over the full frequency range of the plug-in
SWEEP TIME: fastest allowable for plug-in
Markers/Modulation: off, Marker frequency values reset to center of band
Vernier/Offset: 0 MHz
SAVE/RECALL: allregisterssetto INSTR PRESET value (if Opt. 001 Non-volatile
memory, values unchanged) |
When using 83500 series plug-ins:
POWER LEVEL: maximum leveled value
RF, CW Filter: on
ALC MODE: INT
CRYSTAL MARKERS: off (50MHz lamp on)
24
Figure 3-7. Instrument State (1 of 2)
Model 8350A
Operating Information
REMOTE: Sets Sweep Oscillator into remote HP-IB operation.
LIMITATIONS/CONCERNS
for the controller and should be avoided.
LOCAL FUNCTION PROCEDURE:
|. Local key will not function 1f a Local Lockout has been implemented.
2. Allowable HP-IB addresses are from 0 thru 30. However the value 21 1s typically reserved
3. The HP-IB address set remains in effect until line power is turned off. At power turn on the
internal HP-IB address switches are read and used as the address unless 8350A Option 001
is used. If Option 001 1s used, the HP:IB address will remain unchanged.
4, If an instrument problem occurs Section 8 ofthe manual contains some operator initiated
tests. These tests may isolate problems to enable service (via blue tag) to repair them faster.
Data Forms
Function Activate 8 ange and
On/Off | Knob | Step | Keyboard esolution
Local Key X
Select HP-IB Address x} Integers
from 0 to 30
Instrument X
Preset
Remote Not Available
"Address entered only after pressing the GHz, MHz, or dBm keys.
REMOTE FUNCTION PROCEDURE:
Program Code
Mode Function —
Prefix Resolution
Use HP - IB
Local
068 Command
Select N .
HP-IB Address Not Available
instrument Instrument IP
Preset Preset
Remote Use HP - IB
Command
Figure 3-7. Instrument State (2 of 2)
25
Operating Information Model 8350A
FREQUENCY Markers/Sweep TIME-Marker Transfer
DESCRIPTION
The frequency marker functions consist of up to five independent and contiuously variable
frequency markers. The Marker A function displays the difference frequency between any two
markers. MKR — CF sets the effective sweep center frequency (CF) equal to the active marker
frequency. MARKER SWEEP initiates/exits sweep between Marker 1 and Marker 2. After exit,
sweep returns to original sweep limits. The FREQUENCY/TIME display will display active
marker irequency, Marker A frequency, Sweep Time, or frequency in manual sweep mode.
PANEL LAYOUT
EM FREQUENCY/TIME E
GHz №
OO] me |
sec В
ALL OFF
FUNCTIONS/INDICATORS
Markers 1 to 5: Each marker (M1 through M5) can be enabled and a frequency value
defined. The last marker engaged is the active marker and it is the one modifiable by the control,
step keys, keyboard, or remote control. Lamp off indicates marker off, lamp on, indicates
marker on and lamp flickering indicates marker is active,
Active marker off: Turns off the active frequency marker and saves previous previous value.
The value 18 recalled when marker 1s turned on later.
All Markers Off: Turns off all frequency markers saving the values of each to be recalled
later when markers are turned on.
Marker Delta: Selects the MKR A mode where the FREQUENCY/TIME display indicates
the frequency difference between the active frequency marker and the previously active
frequency marker. The active markeris still active and modifiable via the FREQUENCY/TIME
knob, step keys, keyboard or remotely. If in intensity marker mode the display trace is
intensified between the two selected frequency markers.
Marker to Center Frequency: This function takes the value of the presently active
frequency marker and reassigns it to the CW frequency, Center Frequency, or effective center
frequency of the Start/Stop sweep. The frequency marker value is unchanged, the previous
center frequency value is lost.
Figure 3-8. Frequency Markers/Sweep Time — Marker Transfer (1 of 4)
26
Model 8350A
Operating Information
Marker Sweep: This function temporarily uses the values of Markers 1 and 2 and reassigns
them to the Start and Stop frequencies respectively. The previous values of the Start and Stop
frequencies are saved and reassigned when exiting Marker Sweep mode. If Marker 1 is greater
than Marker 2 (or M2 less than M1) the lower frequency is used for the Start frequency, and the
higher value for the Stop frequency. Note that the values of Markers 1 and 2 and hence the
temporary Start and Stop frequency values can be modified in marker sweep mode by using
either the start or the stop controls or M1 or M2 controls. The new values of M1 and M2 are
retained upon exiting Marker Sweep mode. —
Marker 1 to Start, Marker 2 to Stop: This functions the same as marker sweep except that
the Start and Stop frequencies are permanently reassigned and not restorable to their previous
values.
Counter Interface Enable and Disable: When Sweep Oscillator is used in swept mode this
function enables the use of the 5343A Microwave Frequency Counter to count Start, Stop, or
Marker frequencies.
LIMITATIONS/CONCERNS
|. All frequency markers are initialized to the value of the center frequency of the frequency
range of the plug-in at power on.
tJ
+
Frequency markers 1f active and the present value is out of the present sweep frequency
range, will be reassigned the value of the present effective center frequency when the
FREQUENCY/ TIME knob is first turned.
3. Hnomarkers are presently active when entering MKR A, Markers I and 2 are assumed the
active and previously active markers respectively.
4. IfMarker! frequency is higherthan Marker 2 frequency then these values are permanently
interchanged in Marker Sweep mode.
5. Start and Stop values are modified to correspond to the new center frequency and old
sweep width in MKR—CF. Likewise the A Frequency Span and Start/Stop may be
modified so that the new frequency sweep is within the frequency range of the plug-in.
6. If no marker 1s presently active the previously active marker 1s assumed. At power on
Marker 1 1s assumed to be the active marker.
7. If Marker and/or Marker? are not on when entering Marker Sweep mode, they are turned
on and their previous values used. At power on, all markers are assigned the value of the
effective center frequency of the plug-in frequency range.
8. If sweep width 1s out of range when MKR — CF is engaged it will automatically scale down
the A Frequency to be within plug-in frequency range.
9. “The plug-in and markers have the capability of 2 percent frequency overrange, if this
occurs a flickering of the GHz or MHz indicators will occur.
Figure 3-8. Frequency Markers/Sweep Time — Marker Transfer (2 of 4)
27
Operating Information
Model 8350A
LOCAL FUNCTION PROCEDURE:
Data Forms
Function Activate
On/Off | Knob | Step | Keyboard‘
Range and
Resolution
Markers X x x
Marker À X X X
Marker to
Center Frequency
Marker
Sweep
Permanent
Marker Sweep
Turn Off
Active Marker
Turn Off
All Markers
Counter Interface [function |
Counter Interface
Disable
Range
See plug-in
Resolution:
024%
of band
! Values must end with terminator (GHz or MHz).
28
Figure 3-8. Frequency Markers{Sweep Time - Marker Transfer {3 of 4)
Model 8350A
Operating Information
REMOTE FUNCTION PROCEDURE:
Program Code
Mode Function
Prefix Range Resolution Suffix Scale
| Select and |
Markers Position Markers MI to MS Plug-in 024%
A Marker Disp avs on erence SH MI GZ X10°
ETEQUENCY MZ Xx 10%
KZ X10°
MKR "CF Active Marker To MC HZ De
MARKER Sweep UN MP1
SWEEP M1 and M2 OFF MPO
MARKER Permanent
SWEEP Marker Sweep SH MP
| MO
OFF Active Marker Off M1 to M5 MO
. € MO
ALL OFF All Markers Off SH
MO
| Counting End Points | FA, FB, or
Counter Interface or Marker On MI to MS
Swept Frequency St M2
Counter Interface Disables -
Disable swept Counting SH M3
Figure 3-8. Frequency Markers/Sweep Time — Marker Transfer (4 of 4)
Operating Information Model 8350A
Storage Registers
DESCRIPTION
The Save n function allows all the control settings to be stored in one of the nine internal
registers. The Recall n function will implement the previously stored settings. Alternate n
function alternates between current state and register selected on successive sweeps.
PANEL LAYOUT
SAVE п RECALL nt ALT=
FUNCTIONS/INDICATORS
SAVE: Enables current settings (modes, frequencies etc.) to be stored in a register. Nine
registers are available for storage (1 through 9).
RECALL: Enables a resetting of one of the nine stored register modes. When enabled the
registers may be incremented with the UP control or decremented with the down control
Registers not previously stored will contain the mstrument preset settings.
Alternate: Alternates between currentstate and selected stored register on successive sweeps.
If used with appropriate HP 8755C, current state response 15 on channel 1 and selected state
response is on channel 2.
LIMITATIONS/CONCERNS
|. Unused registers have instrument preset values stored until new new values are stored.
2. The instrument preset function sets all registers to instrument preset settings except in
Option 001 instruments which retain stored settings even with AC power off.
3. Remote Step Up Advance (Programming Connector) or Auto Step allows cycling of
storage registers.
30
Figure 3-9. Storage Registers (1 of 2)
Model 8350A
Operating Information
LOCAL FUNCTION PROCEDURE:
Data Forms |
Function Activate Range and |
Gn/Off | Knob | Step | Keyboard esoiution
Store Settings X Integers 1 to 9
Recall Settings X} X Integers 1 to 9
Alternate Sweep X} X Integers 1 to 9
Settings
Alternate Sweep Off X Xx
1Step keys activated only after a number has been entered.
REMOTE FUNCTION PROCEDURE:
Program Code
Mode Function
| Prefix Range Resolution Suffix Scale
ANTE Store Current Register
SAVE Settings SV | 10 9
RECALL Resets Stored RC Register
Settings | to 9
Successive Sweep ALI Register
Selected and Current | to 9
ALTERNATE
Alternate Off ALO
Figure 3-9. Storage Registers (2 of 2)
31
Operating Information | Model 8350A
SWEEP/SWEEP TRIGGER
DESCRIPTION
This function Block contains seven keys for control of sweep source and time. This block also
hasa SWP LED to indicate sweep in progress. The SWEEP type keys enable selection of EXT,
MAN or TIME sweep controls. The SWEEP TRIGGER keys enable selection of INTernal,
LINE, EXTernal and SINGLE sources of sweep triggering, Lights on keys indicate active
function.
PANEL LAYOUT
SWEEP TRIGGER
INT LINE EXT SINGLE
EXT SWEEP TIME
009 OJO
FUNCTIONS/INDICATORS
SWEEP EXTERNAL: Enables sweep input via front or rear panel SWP input BNC (SWP
INPUT 0 to 10 volts) to externally tune plug-in oscillator.
SWEEP MANUAL: Enable manual control of sweep voltage via frequency inputs. Manual
frequency is displayed on FREQUENCY/TIME display.
SWEEP TIME: Enables internally timed sweep. The triggering for TIME may be one of the
following sweep trigger modes.
INT: Enables internal sweep triggering (iree run, auto).
LINE: Enables triggering by power line frequency.
SWEEP TRIGGER EXT: Enables external triggering of sweep via rear panel auxiliary
connector pin 9. A two volt trigger (20 volts max) must be supplied to auxiliary connector.
SINGLE: Selects and/or triggers or aborts single sweep.
LIMITATIONS/CONCERNS
i. SWEEP TRIGGER controls work only in TIME sweep mode.
2. Usingthe step keys with sweep time forces specific values in a 1,2,5 sequence such as 10ms,
20ms, 50ms, 100ms, etc. No step value can be set for sweep time.
3. When firstengaged, single sweep is selected if in a different sweep trigger mode. If presently
in single sweep, this triggers a new sweep.
32
Figure 3-10. Sweep/Sweep Trigger (1 of 2)
Model 8350A
Operating Information
LOCAL FUNCTION PROCEDURE:
Data Forms
. , Range and
Function Activate Resolution
On/Off | Kneb | Step | Keyboard!
SWEEP TYPE X
External
Manual X X X Range: Present
Sweep Width
Resolution:
0.01% of
present sweep
Time X x? X Range: 0.01 to 100
sec.” . Resolution:
0.001 sec.
SWEEP TRIGGER X
Internal
Line X
External Volts x 210 5
| Volts Input
Key and Triggers
>The step size may not be set for time.
> Each mode (except TIME) disables other modes.
*The limit for broad band sweeps is higher than 0.01 second.
REMOTE FUNCTION PROCEDURE:
Program Code
Mode Function -
| Prefix Range Resolution Suffix Scale
External SX
GZ X10”
- MZ X10
Sweep Type Manual SM Frequency KZ X103
HZ X1
X1 second
Time ST 0.61100 0.001 SC X10
second second MS
seconds
Internal TI
Line T2
Sweep Trigger
External T3
Single Та
Figure 3-10. Sweep/Sweep Trigger (2 of 2)
Operating Information Model 8350A
DATA ENTRY-Step Keys/Keyboard
DESCRIPTION
This function block contains the step key function, numeric entry keyboard and terminators
which allow modification of many of the values of functions. This function block has a back key
which works like a erase or rubout of the lastentry. Also in this function block is a shift key (blue)
which enables shift key functions.
PANEL LAYOUT
DATA ENTRY — e iii amo,
FUNCTIONS/INDICATORS
STEP SIZE: This function allows the setting of the frequency or power level step size.
@ (step up): This function increments the presently active parameter value by the appro-
priate step size.
> (step down): This function decrements the presently active parameter value by the
appropriate step size.
0-9,—,.: Numeric digits, sign, and decimal point useable to input data for active function.
BACK SPACE: This function performs a character back space, or rubout, to erase the last
digit entered on the present numeric entry. Function enabled only when entering a number and
units terminator have not been entered.
GHz/s: Units terminator for Gigahertz frequency data or seconds time data.
MHz/ms: Units terminator for Megahertz frequency data or millisecond time data.
dBm/dB: Units terminator for dbm or dB power data.
SHIFT (blue key): This function enables the “shift” functions that are labeled in blue on the
front panel or required key code in remote HP-IB.
LIMITATIONS/CONCERNS
I.
Step size not settable for sweep time, It ıs a 1,2,5 data progression like 10 msec, 20 msec, 50
msec, [00msec, etc.
No visable data display for step size values.
Step size entry 1s differentiated via units terminator (ie. frequency or power step).
All numeric entries are not input/entered until the appropriate units terminator is entered.
ho + >
Auto Step via depressing up or down key causes the active parameter to be stepped as long
as the key 1s depressed.
6. The dBm/dB key will be a default value of Hz or sec.
Figure 3-11. Data Entry- Step Keys/Keyboard (1 of 2)
Model 8350A
Operating Information
7. Negative numeric data must be entered with negative sign first.
8. Blank and unnecessary negative signs are ignored by the sweep oscillator.
9. Some shift functions are not labeled on the front panel, References Shift Function section.
10. Shift key indicator on until a correct shift function key stroke 1s entered.
11. The default Step Size values are 0.1% of the present AF for frequency parameters, | dB for
power parameters,
LOCAL FUNCTION PROCEDURE:
Data Forms
Range and
Function Activate Resolution
On/Off Knob Step | Keyhoard
STEP SIZE {Frequency X X X Range:
Frequency Parameter) See plug-in
uo frequency limits.
Resolution:
1 MHz
STEP SIZE (Power Parameter) X X X Range:
Power SIE X X X See plug-in
power limits
Resolution:
0.01 dB
Reset to default X
STEP SIZE
REMOTE FUNCTION PROCEDURE:
Program Code
Mode Function
Prefix Range Resolution Suffix Scale
GZ X10°
Frequency SF See Plug-in | MHz MZ x10°
Step Size Frequency KZ X10°
STEP SIZE Limits HZ Xi
Power ,
Step Size SP See Plug-in 0.1 dB DM
STEP Step Up UP
INCREMENT (а)
STEP Step Down DN
DECREMENT (+)
BACK SPACE Back Space BK
Default Reset to default SH SS
STEP SIZE STEP SIZE
Figure 3-11. Data Entry — Step Keys/ Keyboard (2 of 2)
35
Operating Information Model 8350A
Modulation/ Bianking
DESCRIPTION
This function block controls the frequency marker display mode, RF power and external CRT
control. Mainframe frequency markers can be RF amplitude dips or CRT intensity dots (via Z-
axis control). The RF powercan be turned off during the retrace sweep. The CRT display retrace
sweep can be blanked. The internal squarewave amplitude modulation can be enabled. The
squarewave frequency 15 27.8 KHz standard for proper operation with the HP 8755 Frequency
Response Test Set or internally selectable (see Section IV) for 1 KHz for proper operation with
the HP 415 SWRKR Meter and other instruments. The sweep input/output connectoris also in this
block.
PANEL LAYOUT
AMPTO DISPi, RF
MKR BLANK BLANK = SWEEP QUTPUT
3000 ©
ON/OFF
SWEEP INPUT
FUNCTIONS/INDICATORS
AMPLITUDE MARKER: This function when engaged (light on) sets the mainframe
frequency markers into RF amplitude dips instead of CRT intensity dots (via Z-axis control).
DISPLAY BLANKING:. This function when engaged (light on) blanks the retrace sweep on
CRT displays via Z—axis control.
RF BLANKING: This function when engaged (light on) blanks (turns off) the RF power
during the retrace sweep.
¿nm SQUAREWAVE MODULATION: This function when engaged (light on) enables the
internal amplitude modulation squarewave. The standard squarewave frequency 1s 27.8 KHz,
internally selectable to 1 KHz.
SWEEP QOUTPUT/INPUT: When Sweep Oscillator is in manual or time sweep mode this
connector provides a linear ramp voltage from 0 to 10 volts that is synchronous with RF sweep.
In external sweep mode connector is input for a sweep ramp from 1 to 10 volts.
LIMITATIONS/CONCERNS
1. Changing frequency of modulation (1 or 27.8 KHz) requires removal of a jumper (see
Adjustment section).
2. Plug-in frequency markers are controlled from plug-in for CRT intensity dots or RE
amplitude dips.
Figure 3-12. Modulation/Blanking (1 of 2)
36
Model 8350A Operating Information
Internal squarewave modulation and a External AM signal can be used simultaneously.
CRT Z-axis control is provided with both positive and negative polarity control for
blanking (via rear panel POS Z-BLLANK or NEG Z-BLANK). Mainframe frequency
markers, when used in the CRT intensity dot mode are useable with positive polarity Z-axis
control only.
LOCAL FUNCTION PROCEDURE:
- Data Forms
Function Activate range and
On/Off | Kneb | Step | Keyboard esolution
Amplitude x
Markers
Display
Blanking x
RF
Blanking x
Squarewave x
Modulation
REMOTE FUNCTION PROCEDURE:
Program Code
Mode Function :
Prefix Range Resolution Suffix Scale
Amplitude Amplitude Marker On AKI
Markers Amplitude Marker Off AKO
Display Blanking On DPI
Display Bianking Off DPO
Blanking RF Blanking On RPI
RF Blanking Off RPO
“E |
Modulation Modulation On MDI
Ll! Modulation Off MDO
Figure 3-12. Modulation/Blanking (2 of 2)
37
Operating Information Model 8350A
POWER Control
DESCRIPTION
This function block contains all functions relating to the RF output power level. The desired
power level can be set. To compensate for a linear lose through a device (like a cable) on the
output of the plug-in, a slope compensation can be set to level the output. To provide a ramp of
output power, a power sweep width can be set and the Power Sweep function enabled. Power
Sweep starts the RF output power at the Power Level setting then ramps up the specific Power
Sweep width,
PANEL LAYOUT
EERE POWER ННВИНЕИНОНОНОЦИННЬ
: dB/SWE 3
: 10.0 we |
; dB/GHz
py UNLEVELED
ps y
*
ей
FUNCTIONS/INDICATORS
POWER LEVEL: This function when enabled (light on) allows setting of the output power
level for all ALC modes. Calibrated power level in internal leveling mode only,
POWER SWEEP: This function when enabied (light on) allows setting of the power sweep
width (in dB) for the power sweep function. Power Sweeps from Power Level to Power level plus
Power Sweep width.
SLOPE: This function when engaged (light on) allows setting of the frequency slope
compensation in dB/GHZz. Allows compensation for lossy devices to achieve a flat, leveled
output power at output of device/cable by increasing the output power at higher frequencies.
UNLEVELED Light: Light is on when all or portion of sweep is unleveled.
POWER Display: Provides digital display of Power Level and Power Sweep to a tenth of a dB
and Slope to 0.01 dB. The units for power level are dBm, for power sweep dB, and for slope it is
dB/GHz.
Figure 3-13. Power Control (83500 series Plug-ins) (1 of 2)
38
Model 8350A Operating Information
LIMITATIONS/CONCERNS
l. Power level control is calibrated over a 10 dB range. typically 15 dB. Power Level range up
to 80 dB with plug-in Option 001 (70 dB Step Attenuator).
2. The total combined Slope and Power Sweep range is 15 dB.
3. Power Sweep will not cross a Step Attenuator boundary.
4. Power Sweep and Slope values may not be negative.
LOCAL FUNCTION PROCEDURE;
Data Forms |
Function Activate м so and
On/Off | Knob | Step | Keyboard! ésoiution
Power |
Level x A X
Range:
P ` ri
: oer x x x See plug-in
p Resolution:
0.024 dB
Slope X X X
À
Values must end with terminator (dBm or dB).
REMOTE FUNCTION PROCEDURE:
Program Code
Mode Function
Prefix Range Resolution Suffix Scale
Power Level PL 10-15 dB
Sweep On PS1
25.5 dB DM Xi dBm
Sweep Off PSO 0.01dBm
Power XI dB
Slope On SLI
5 dB/GHz
Slope Off SLO
Figure 3-13. Power Control (83500 series Plug-ins) (2 of 2)
39
Operating Information Model 8350A
Signal Control
DESCRIPTION
This function block controls the signal purity and switches the signal RF off or on. The CW
Filter, when enabled, reduces the oscillator tuning voltage noise and hence Residual FM. The
CW Filter 1s inactive in sweep modes.
PANEL LAYOUT
all CW ENTER
| 08 |
ORDER
FUNCTIONS/INDICATORS
RF ON/OFF: This function switches RF power on (light on) or off (=30dB attenuation).
CW FILTER ON/OFF: This function enables (light on) or disables the oscillator tune
voltage filter when in CW or manual sweep modes only.
LIMITATIONS/CONCERNS
i. CW filter not enabled during sweeps.
LOCAL FUNCTION PROCEDURE:
Data Forms
Function Activate Range and
On/Off | Knob | Step | Keyboard Resolution
RF Power RE X
CW Filter CW FILTER X
REMOTE FUNCTION PROCEDURE:
, Program Code
Mode Function
Prefix Range Resolution Suffix Scale
RE Power On . RF]
Power Off RFO
, Filter On ЕН
CW Filter Filter Off FIO
Figure 3-14, Signal Control (83500 series plug-ins)
40
Model 8350A Operating Information
ALC MODE
DESCRIPTION
This functional block controls all Automatic Leveling Control (ALC) functions of the output
power. Several modes of ALC can be selected, these are Internal, External via a
Crystal/ Detector, or external via a Power Meter.
PANEL LAYOUT
ALC MODE
INT EXT MTR
—uTri REO INPUT
\ RE J e EXT/MTR ALC snd
FUNCTIONS/INDICATORS
INTERNAL ALC: This selects the internal crystal detector/coupler for leveling the output
power at the front panel output connector.
EXTERNAL ALC: This selects the external crystal detector for leveling with the detector
output applied to the front panel External ALC BNC input connector.
METER ALC: This selects the external power meter for leveling with the power meter output
applied to the front panel External ALC input connector.
EXT/ MTR/ALC INPUT: Input connector for External crystal detector and power meter
outputs. |
ALC CAL: Used to adjust external leveling gain when using EXTERNAL leveling. Clockwise
rotation increases gain.
FREQUENCY CAL: Adjustment that allows calibrating the RF plug-in frequency using the
crystal markers, frequency marker indicator, and a CW or Start Frequency value.
LIMITATIONS/ CONCERNS
1. Only crystal detectors of negative polarity (—10 to —150 millivolts) can be used.
2. Only power meter outputs of 0 to 1 volts can be used. The HP 431 and 432 series are
compatible, the HP 435 and 436 are not.
Figure 3-15. ALC Mode (83500 series plug-ins) (1 of 2)
41
Operating Information
Model 8350A
LOCAL FUNCTION PROCEDURE:
Data Forms
Function Activate Range and
On/Off! | Knob | Step | Keyboard esolution
Internal
Leveling A
E e
xternal x
Leveling
Power Meter —
Leveling MIR X
1 Each mode disables all other appropriate modes,
REMOTE FUNCTION PROCEDURE:
Program Code
Mode Function 3
Prefix | Range Resolution Suffix Scale
INTERNAL Al
ALC Leveling External Crystal A2
External Power Meter A3
! Mode disables all other possible modes.
FREQUENCY MARKER INDICATOR: Lamp lites when RF output frequency is
coincident with the selected crystal marker frequency.
47
Figure 3-15. ALC Mode (83500 series plug-ins) (2 of 2)
Model 8350A Operating Information
Crystal MARKER FREQUENCY
DESCRIPTION
This functional block controls the crystal frequency markers by selection of the marker crystal
frequency and the marker display mode (intensity or amplitude). Crystal frequency combs of
| MHz (usable below 1GHz), 10 MHZ, 50 MHZ, or an external frequency may be inputto the rear
panel External Marker input. The crystal frequency markers can be displayed independent of
the mainframe frequency markers in their CRT intensity dot (via Z-axis control) and/or RF
amplitude dips.
PANEL LAYOUT
MARKER FREQ MHz
1 10 60 EXT
©)
15 - -
AMPTD INTENS
MKH MKR MKR
JO) -
FUNCTIONS/INDICATORS
1 MiHz CRYSTAL: Selects (light on) a crystal frequency comb of markers at harmonics of 1
MHZ.
10 MHz CRYSTAL: Selects (light on) a crystal frequency comb of markers at harmonics of
10 MHz.
50 MHz CRYSTAL: Selects (light on) a crystal frequency comb of markers at harmonics of
50 MHz.
EXTERNAL FREQUENCY: Selects frequency markers at the RF frequencies that are input
to the rear panel External Marker input to the rear panel External Marker input. Allowable RF
power range at input is —10 dBm minimum to +10 dBm maximum.
INTENSITY MARKER: Sets the marker display mode to CRT intensity dots via Z-axis
control.
AMPLITUDE MARKER: Sets the marker display mode to RF amplitude dips.
EXTERNAL MARKER INPUT: Rear panel input for external frequency marker.
Maximum drive range —10 to +10 dBm.
Figure 3-16. Crystal Marker Frequency (83500 series plug-ins) (1 of 2)
43
Operating Information
Model 8350A
LIMITATIONS/CONCERNS
1. Plug-in markers display modes are independent of the 8350A mainframe markers. Hence
any combination of intensity or amplitude markers will work.
2, Intensity markers obtainable using the positive polarity Z-axis output only.
3. Maximum drive level of External Marker Input is +10 dBm.
4, Plug-in markers can be intensity and amplitude variety simultaneously.
LOCAL FUNCTION PROCEDURE:
Data Forms d
Function Activate я ; _ de
On/Off | Knob | Step | Keyboard solution
{ MHz Marker i X
10 MHz Marker 16 X
50 MHz Marker 50 X
External X
Amplitude x
Markers
Intensity
Markers X
REMOTE FUNCTION PROCEDURE:
, Program Code
Mode Function : : :
Prefix Range Resolution Suffix Scale
1 MHz ‘ Cl
Í
Crystal Marker 10 MHz A
Frequency 50 MHz’ C3
External Input’ C4
Amplitude MKR On CAl
Amplitude MKR Off CAD
Crystal Marker
Intensity MKR On CII
Intensity MKR Off CIO
: Mode disables the previous mode.
44
Figure 3-16. Crystal Marker Frequency (83500 series plug-ins) {2 of 2)
Model 8350A Operating Information
HP-IB ONLY FUNCTIONS
DESCRIPTION
This section describes functions which are only accessible via the HP-IB. These functions allow
the FIP-IB user to learn about the present instrument state, setup the instrument state, and
enable some special functions to improve HP-IB operation.
FUNCTIONS
INPUT/QUTPUT LEARN STRING: A string of 90 bytes of binary data that completely
describes the present instrument state (does not include the storage registers) of the 8350A and
83500 Series Plug-in. This information is packed and encoded for minimal storage require-
ments thereby making data analysis difficult. If data analysis is necessary, use the Output Mode
String and Output Interrogated Parameter functions instead. When output from the 8350A and
stored in an ASCII character data string, the Learn String can later be input to the 8350A to
restore that instrument state. The length of the Learn String is fixed, independent of the
functions selected and the plug-in used.
The Output Learn String function learns the present sweeper settings only. To learn the storage
register settings, sequentially recall each storage register then learn the present sweeper settings.
Likewise to restore the storage registers, input the learn string for the appropriate storage register
then save the present sweeper settings in the proper register.
INPUT/OUTPUT MICRO LEARN STRING: A string of 8 bytes of binary data that
completely describes the present CW Frequency, Vernier, Sweep Output voltage, and Power
Level of the 8350A and 83500 Series Plug-in. This information is packed and encoded for
minimal storage requirements thereby making data analysis difficult. When output from the
8350A and stored in an ASCII character data string, the Micro Learn String can later be input to
the 8350A to restore the instrument state for rapid CW frequency programming. The length of
the Micro Learn String is fixed, independent of the functions selected and the plug-in used.
In this mode the 8350A numeric displays are blanked and the Micro Learn String bytes are used
to pre-load the appropriate internal DAC’s. For proper operation the 8350A must be in the CW
mode and the plug-in CW Filter capacitor should be off. Since the Micro Learn String overrides
the present values of the 8350A when it is input, do not program any functions while in this
mode. If a function 1s programmed one of two things may occur: 1) the 8350A may exit the Input
Micro Learn String mode with the previous sweeper settings restored, or 2) the 8350A may
interpret the program codes as another Micro Learn String and cause the instrument to enter a
non-predicatable state. The only function that is valid for execution while the Micro Learn
String is in effect is the Network Analyzer Trigger function.
To output the Micro Learn String: 1) program the desired CW frequency, 2) program the “OX”
code, then 3) read the 8 byte string.
To input the Micro Learn String: program the “IX” code and the 8 byte string. When the user
desires to exit the Input Micro Learn String mode and return to the normal mode of operation,
the user must exit properly. When in the Input Micro Learn String mode the 8350A accepts the
input program code/bytes in a special binary entry mode. The mode is exited by programming
Figure 3-17. HP-IB Only Functions (1 of7)
45
Operating Information Model 8350A
the 8350A with a function code that does not start with a number (0—9) or the letters A through F
since these are interpreted as possible Micro Learn String data characters. [tis suggested that the
user exit this mode by using the “M0” code as the mode terminator then restore the numeric
displays via the “CW”, “ST”, and “PL” function codes.
QUTPUT MODE STRING: A string of 25 bytes of binary data that describes all of the
presently active functions of the 8350A and 83500 Series Plug-in. This information is not packed
thus allowing simple data analysis. The information passed indicates only which functions are
presently active functions with no numeric values included. By determining the decimal value
of each byte the user can determine which function is active. To determine the actual numeric
value of some functions use the Output Interrogated Parameter function. The length of the
Mode String is fixed, independent of the functions selected and the plugin used.
OUTEUT INTERROGATED PARAMETER: The 8350A outputs the present numeric
value of the instructed parameter that is to be interrogated. Any parameter that has a numeric
value associated with it such as Start Frequency, Sweep Time, etc, can be interrrogated. The
units of the output data are Hz, dBm, dB, or sec, implied with the function selected.
OUTPUT ACTIVE PARAMETER: The 8350A outputs the numeric value of the parameter
that is presently active, ie. enabled for value modification from the step keys or data entry. The
units of the output data are Hz, dBm, dB, or sec., implied with the function selected.
OUTPUT STATUS: The 8350A outputs 2 sequential bytes, 8 bits wide, that indicate the
present instrument status. The first status byte is equivalent to the Status Byte of the Serial Poll
(the Status Byte Message), the second status byte is the Extended Status Byte which provides
additional information. See the Status Byte Information table for a description of each Status
Byte. Status Byte values are cleared upon execution of a Serial Poll (the Status Byte Message),
Device Clear (the Clear Message), and/or Instrument Preset function command.
Status Byte Information Table
STATUS BYTE (#1)
BIT # 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DECIMAL
VALUE 128 64 32 16 8 4 à 1
FUNCTION N/A REQUEST ¡SRQ on SRQ on N/A SRQ on N/A SRQ on
SERVICE Syntax End of Change in Numeric
(RQS) Error Sweep Extended Parameter
Status Byte Altered to
Default
Value
EXTENDED STATUS BYTE (42)
BIT # 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DECIMAL
VALUE 128 64 32 16 8 4 À T
FUNCTION [Airflow *RF Power N/A N/A N/A N/A Self Test
Failure Unleveled | Failure/on Failed
*Bit/Functions not usable with 86200 Series Plug-ins and T1869A Adapter.
Figure 3-17. HP-IB Only Functions {2 of 7)
46
Model 8350A Operating Information
SERVICE REQUEST MASK: This determines which bits within the 8350A Status Byte
(byte #1) can cause the 8350A to send a Request Service (RQS) Message to the HP-IB controller.
The Request Mask 1s a one 8-bit byte value where with each bit position corresponds to the same
bit position as in the 8350A Status Byte. If in the Request Mask byte a bit is set (logical ‘1’) then
this condition is enabled for ROS generation. If the bit value is cleared (logical ‘0’) then the bit is
ignored. The Request Mask value ranges from decimal 0 to 255 where the decimal value can be
determined by summing the decimal values of each Status Byte bit to be enabled (the user need
not select the RQS bit). The default at power on is a Request Mask byte of ‘00000000’ or decimal
0. The Request Mask 1s reset to the default value at power on only and is not affected by an
Instrument Preset.
NETWORK ANALYZER TRIGGER (8410B): This causes an external trigger pulse to be
generated for the HP 8410B Microwave Network Analyzer to re-phase lock on the present RF
signal. This is used to insure proper HP-IB operation in stepped CW frequency sweeps to
guarantee that the 8410B 1s phase-locked at the proper RF frequency after CW settling,
RESET SWEEP: This aborts the present single sweep that is in progress and resets the sweep
so thatitcan be triggered again. This function is enabled only if the 8350A is in the Single Sweep
Trigger mode and has the same effect as programming a single sweep trigger (“T4”),
TAKE SWEEP: This triggers a single sweep. This function is enabled only if the 8350A is in
the Single Sweep Trigger mode and has the same effect as programming a single sweep trigger
(“T4”). .
DISPLAY UPDATE ON/OFF: This selects whether or not the 8350A updates its numeric
displays upon further programming of any parameter with a numeric value. The function
reduces the amountof time involved in programming the 8350A numerically related parameters
(1e. CW Frequency) and aids in producing faster stepped CW frequency sweeps. The default at
power on and Instrument Preset is the Display Update On state. When in the Display Update
Off state, the 8350A numeric displays will be blanked.
FM SENSITIVITY (83500 Series Plug-ins Only): This selects the External FM Input
sensitivity of —20 MHz per volt or —6 MHz per volt. This function is normally selected with an
internal plug-in switch but can be overriden via the HP-IB. Note that the FM sensitivity is reset
to the switch position after an Instrument Preset is executed. Thus the user should select the
desired sensitivity after every Instrument Preset
LIMITATIONS/CONCERNS
l. When using the Micro Learn String (both input and Output), the 8350A must be in the CW
mode and the plug-in CW Filter capacitor should be off.
2. You must exit the Input Micro Learn String mode with the “M0” code only. The numeric
displays will still be blanked until the appropriate functions are re-activated.
Figure 3-17. HP-IB Only Functions {3 of 7)
47
Operating Information
All Learn String and Micro Learn String characters must be retained and re-input to the
8350A. If the 8350A does not receive the expected number of characters it will undergo an
Instrument Preset.
The valid functions for the Output Interrogated Parameter are: FA, CW, CF, DE, FB, VR,
SHVR., M1, M2, M3, M4, M5, SHMI, SF, SM, ST, PL, PS, SL, and SP.
The Request Mask byte value is reset only when another value is programmed. It 1s
unaffected by Instrument Preset,
The plug-in FM Sensitivity range is reset after an Instrument Preset to the value selected by
the internal switch.
The Output Learn String, Output Micro Learn String, Output Mode String, and Output
Status functions send a Data message consisting of a string of 8-bitbinary bytes terminated
using the bus END command (EOI and ATN true) with the last byte. The Output
Interrogated Parameter and Output Active functions send a Data message consisting of a
14 character ASCTI string representing the numeric value in exponential form terminated
with a Carriage Return/Line Feed (CR/LT).
Binary Syntax; |b***b] [EOI]
Numeric Syntax: [+d.dddddE+ dd] |CR] [LF]
Where the character ‘b’ indicates an 8-bit binary byte and “d' indicates a decimal digit (0
through 9). Note that the binary output format could have bytes that may be misinterpreted
as Carriage Returns and/or Line Feeds so the user should defeat the ASCII CR/LF as valid
character string terminators and rely on the byte count.
REMOTE FUNCTION PROCEDURE:
Model 8350A
Input
Mode Function 8350A Output Response Notes
Prefix Data To Input
Display DISPLAY DUI
Update UPDATE ON ’
On/Off
DISPLAY
UPDATE OFF DU
EM —20 MHz/V Fi
Sensitivity —6 MHz/V E
48
Figure 3-17. HP-IB Only Functions {4 of 7)
Model 8350A Operating Information
REMOTE FUNCTION PROCEDURE:
input
Mode Function 8350A Output Response Notes
Prefix Data To Input
OUTPUT
LEARN OL 90 bytes [EOI
STRING
Learn
String INPUT
LEARN IL 90 bytes
STRING
OUTPUT
MICRO LEARN OX 8 bytes [EOI]
Micro STRING
Learn
String INPUT
MICRO LEARN IX 8 bytes
STRING |
Mode OUTPUT
Strin MODE OM 25 bytes [EOI]
5 STRING
2 Valid Functions:
FA, CW, CF, DF,
Output OUTPUT OP | (Function +d.dddddE+dd EB, MÍ, M2, M3, |
Interrogated INTERROGATE CR/LF Má, MS, VR,
Parameter Prefix) | | SHYR, SHMI,
ES, ST, SM, PL,
PS, SL, SP
put OUTPUT OA +d.dddddE+dd
Parameter ACTIVE [CR/LF]
Output |
OUTPUT |
За STATUS OS 2 bytes [EOH
ytes
Request REQUEST
Mask MASK RM I byte
Reset RESET RS
Sweep SWEEP
Take TAKE TS
Sweep SWEEP
Figure 3-17. HP-IB Only Functions (5 of 7)
49
Operating Information
Model 8350A
MODE STRING (1 of 2)
e Je 23790 Example Description
| 00000000 0 SWEEP MODE: Start/Stop
00000001 | CW
00000010 2 CF/AF
2 00000000 0 SWEEP TRIGGER: nt
00900001 1 Line
00000019 2 Ext
00000011 3 Single
3 00000000 Ö SWEEP SOURCE: Time
00000001 | Man
00000010 2 Ext
MODULATION/BLANKING:
4 0000--—1 On Amplitude Mkr On/Off (On=1, Off=0)
G000-— ! — On Display Blanking On/Off
0009-1-- Оп RF Blanking On/Off
00001 — On Sq. Wave Modulation On/Off
5 00000000 0 ACTIVE MARKER #: Mi
00000001 | M2
000000106 2 M3
0000001 1 3 M4
00000100 4 MS
6 00090000 0 REFERENCE MAKRER # Mi
00000001 | M2
00009010 2 M3
060000 1 1 3 M4
00000100 4 M5
7 000———1 On MARKERS ON/OFF: Mi (On=:i, Off=0)
000——I— On M2
000 {~~ On M3
000-1--- Оп M4
000 1——— On MS
COUNTER TRIGGER PARAMETER:
8 00000000 0 Start Freq.
0000000 | ] Stop Freq.
000008 10 2 Marker Freq.
SPECIAL CONDITIONS:
9 -—- On Non-Swept CW On/Off (On=1, Off=0)
= On Default Step Size On/Off
re am | Yes Vernier Negative Yes/No (Yes=l, No=0)
= | an Yes Offset Negative Yes/No
—— | не On Mkr A Mode On/Off
mo | ae On Mkr Sweep Mode On/Off
mises On Counter Trigger On/Off
| ms On Alt. Sweep On/Off
KEYBOARD ASSIGNMENT:
10 00000000 0 Start
0000600 1 | Stop
00000010 2 CW/CF
0000001 1 3 AF
00000100 4 Vernier
00000101 5 Offset
00000110 6 Markers
50
Figure 3-17. HP-IB Only Functions (6 of 7)
Model 8350A Operating Information
MODE STRING (2 of 2}
ve 76 437 10 Example Description
10 (Cont’d} 060001 1 ! 7 Step Size
00001000 8 Sweep Time
00601001 9 Manual Sweep
00001010 10 Save/Recall/ Alt
00001011 11 Hex Entry Address
00001100 12 Hex Entry Data
00001101 13 Key Test
00001110 14 HP.IB Address
Cililild 127 None
01000000 128 Power Level
01000001 129 Power Sweep
01000010 130 Slope
| 00000000 0 ALTERNATE REGISTER #: 0
00000001 ! 1
00000010 2 2
00000011 3 3
00000100 4 4
00000101 5 5
00000110 6 6
00000111 7 7
00001000 8 8
00001001 9 9
12 00000000 0 NOT DEFINED
13 00000000 0 ALC Mode: Int
00000001 1 Ext
090000 10 2 Mtr
POWER CONTROL:
14 0000001 On CW Filter On/Off (On=1, Off=0)
0000001- On Power Sweep On/Off
POWER FUNCTIONS:
15 000000-1 On Slope On/Off (On=1, Off=0)
0000001 - On Power Swcep OnéOff
CRYSTAL MARKER MODES:
16 0000001 On Amplitude Mkr On/Off (On=1, Off=0)
0000001- On Intensity Mkr On/Off
CRYSTAL MARKER FREQUENCY:
17 09009000 0 1 MHZ
00000001 i 10 MHz
00000010 2 50 MHz
000000611 3 Ext Freq
FM INPUT SENSITIVITY:
18 00000000 0 —20 MHz/V
00000001 i —6 MHz/V
19 00000000 О NOT DEFINED
20 00000000 0
21 00000600 О
22 00000000 0
23 09900900 0
24 00909000 0
25 00000000 0
END OF MODE STRING
Figure 3-17. HP-IB Only Functions (7 of 7)
51/52
TAL
afl, © nln
MATA ETE
HEWLETY FACKARD
RABAT PLL ray
COEC
AVE RA
ud ep
Jor
ео:
EEE
HEWLETT
PACKARD
© Copyright
MANUAL PART NO. 08350-96001
Microfiche Part No, 08350-90002
HEWLETT-PACKARD COMPANY
1400 FOUNTAIN GROVE PARKWAY, SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA 95404
1980
Printed: AUGUST 1980
Model 8350A Local Operation
LOCAL OPERATION
INTRODUCTION
This Local Operation handbook provides information on the local use (non HP-1B) of the
8350A Sweep Oscillator with 83500 series Plug-ins. Throughout this handbook are blocks of
example procedures on implementing some of the information. The front panel controls are
divided into function groups. These groups and and other information topics are arranged in
the following sequence:
®
®
GETTING STARTED
GETTING STARTED — Brief example of control usage.
INSTRUMENT PRESET -- Error codes and preset conditions.
DATA ENTRY — Numeric, step, units, and shift keys.
FREQUENCY — Mode selection, vernier and offset.
FREQUENCY/TIME — Markers and sweep control.
SAVEn/RECALLn/ALTn — Storage Registers, Step Up Advance.
DISPLAY FUNCTIONS — Blanking, Modulation, and Sweep Out/In.
83500 SERIES PLUG-INS — Power, signal, and crystal markers.
USE WITH SPECIFIC MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT:
HP 8755S Frequency Response Test Set
HP 8410B Network Analyzer
HP 7010B and other X-Y Recorders
HP 5343A Frequency Counter
APPENDIX 1 — Rear panel connector information.
APPENDIX 2 — Use of 86200 series Plug-Ins with 11869A Adapter.
APPENDIX 3 — Summary of Sweep Oscillator front panel controls with fold-out front
panel drawing. |
NOTE
If a 86200 series RF Plug-in and 11869A Adapter are used, the plug-in
coding on the adapter must be set properly to get the correct frequency
display.
When the 8350A is turned on or when the INSTR PRESET key is pressed the front panel of the
8350A is set to the following pre-determined state: The RF output is swept over the full frequency
range of the plug-in at the maximum specified leveled output power, minimum sweep time for
the RF Plug-in installed, and the internal square wave amplitude modulation 1s off.
Local Operation Model 8350A
Example:
8350A with 83525A 0.01-8.4 GHz Plug-in
To change from the INSTR PRESET state to 4.2 to 62 GHz sweep (in START/STOP
mode), 0.20 second sweep time, +4.5 dBm output power, 27.8 KHz square wave modulation
on RF output:
1. Press the START key and then rotate the START control clockwise to increase the
start frequency until the display above the START key reads 4.200 GHz
2. Rotate the STOP control counterclockwise to decrease the STOP frequency to 6.500
GHZ.
3. Press the TIME key, then turn the FREQUENCY/TIME control clockwise to
increase the sweep time to 0.2 second (displayed on the FREQUENCY/TIME
display).
4. | OD key to activate the internal 27.8 KHz square wave modulation. The
lamp 1 in the center of the key will be on.
5.
HEE key, then turn the plug-in POWER control until the
INSTRUMENT PRESET
This condition occurs when the power is turned on or when the INSTR PRESET key is pressed.
INSTR PRESET causes an internal self test to occur after which the instrument wiil be set to the
preset condition. If certain internal errors or failures are detected during the self test or during
normal operation of the 8350A they are indicated via error codes in the form “Ennn” (where
--n=0 , 9) read from the left FREQUENCY display. For a complete description of the error . |.
code listing see the Operating and Service Manual Section 8. The error codes are:
E001 Plug-in interface failure. Check plug-in.
E002 Sweep voltage DAC/Marker voltage DAC failure
E003 Tuning voltage DAC/Marker voltage DAC failure
Figure 1. Instrument Preset Key (1 of 2)
Model 8350A Local Operation
E004 Power supply failure
E005 Instrument interface bus failure
E006 Front panel bus failure
E007 ROM failure
E008
F009
£010
БО! RAM failure
E012
E013
Е014
E015 Microprocessor failure
E016 Insufficient cooling. Check fan.
If the self test completes without errors the instrument presets to:
SWEEP MODE: START/STOP, over full frequency range of plug-in
SWEEP TIME: fastest allowable for plug-in
MARKERS: off
MODULATION: off
SWEEP TRIGGER/SWEEP: INT, TIME
VERNIER/OFFSET: 0 MHz
DISPLAY BLANKING: on
SAVE/RECALL: Initial power on sets all memory locations to INSTR PRESET state, if
using 8350A Option 001 (Non—Volatile Memory) or if instrument is already on, the
memory values remain unchanged when INSTR PRESET is pressed.
ALL OTHER FUNCTIONS: off
When using 83500 series Plug-ins:
POWER LEVEL: maximum specified leveled value
RF and CW FILTER: on
ALC MODE: INT
CRYSTAL MARKERS: off (83522A, 83525A only)
ALL OTHER FUNCTIONS: off
Figure 1. Instrument Preset Key (2 of 2)
Local Operation
Model 8350A
Rr
ты ams
os
IFEWLETY « РАСЖАНЫИ
MAYEN PIALE € ALTA |
ar KE dn
EA TOS
й MARKED FAIRS Reba
FA
ELA 1 "" o a
IA ne
va TEA
Ta
AMAR LA EAL
MER Hu MEF
da
Ail MODE
THFLT
DATA ENTRY
Number/unit keys
This section contains the numeric keyboard, terminators (i.e.,, GHz, seconds, dBm), step
size/up/down, backspace and shift keys. In addition to using the appropriate control, a function
value can be set to an exact value or incremented by a specific amount via the keyboard.
These keys are used to enter values of frequency, time or power. Holding a number key down
causes it to repeat.
Example:
or
To enter a START frequency of 1.870 GHz:
to enter the equivalent frequency in MHZz.
Step UP and Step DOWN keys
Backspace Key BK SP. Prior to pressing a units key the value entered from the keyboard
may be changed via the BK SP key without effecting the current instrument state. The backspace
key allows the user to alter digits already entered.
These keys increment or decrement the active parameter (including memory registers) by the
STEP SIZE or preset amount. By holding either key down the 8350A will continue to step
Figure 2. Data Entry (1 of 2)
Model 8350A Local Operation
therefore eliminating the need for the user to repeatedly press the step keys. The STEP UP
function may be engaged via the remote STEP UP ADVANCE on the rear panel Programming
Connector. The STEP UP ADVANCE 15 incremented by supplying contact closure to ground or
logical 0 to pin 22.
STEP SIZE
This key 1s used to enter a frequency or power increment to be used with the UP or DOWN key.
The STEP SIZE key 1s pressed before the quantity is entered. A frequency step that is entered is
common for START, STOP, CF, CW, AF, VERNIER, OFFSET, MARKER and MANUAL
SWEEP parameters. A power step is used for varying POWER LEVEL, POWER SWEEP and
SLOPE. Default values are assigned at power on and instrument preset for step sizes until new
values are entered. Note that a step size cannot be set for sweep time. The keyboard and step keys
affect the last active function. The entered Step Size is not displayed.
Example:
To set a 250 MHz step size:
Press $1
After this, each time the UP or DN key is pressed the active frequency parameter will
change by 250 MHz.
SHIFT key (BLUE)
This key is used to activate the functions coded in blue and some special functions. The lamp in
the center of this key is on when the key is active.
Example:
ANNAN PATA RIE PAI eid niv Sean
Rg ae aT i a a De cop ай:
IA E A TEA AE PER
BEL ER Ea ENE TE FAR SRE TEA
TAE es SERS ET EEE FERRER
ä EEE, TENEN ett E BEA EVA
TAR У ERT SIESTA AA
(MARKERS) ALL OFF. Pressing SHIFT, OFF turns off all markers.
The SHIFT key is also used to set the HP-IB address. Press SHIFT LCL ; the FREQUENCY/
TIME display will indicate the present HP-IB address number. The address may be changed to
any value between 0 and 30 by using the keyboard to enter a number and the GHz, MHz or dBm
key as a terminator. The 8350A is factory preset for an HP-IB address of 19.
NOTE
Address number 21 is normaily reserved for calculator addressing and
HP-1B interface functions and should not be used.
Figure 2. Data Entry (2 of 2)
Local Operation Model 8350A
BT MODE,
90
=
Ta
т
© |
Г.
у
мА MT ALL SEF
SHIH
SWEER AMETO RHI HE es
MH Alarms Hiamk Mi
i
dou
en COTE +
608) 6556
FREQUENCY
This section controls the sweep mode and frequency limits.
START/STOP
When either the START or STOP key is pressed the sweep oscillator is put in START/STOP
mode. Swept RF output begins at START frequency and ends at STOP frequency. The START
frequency must be less than or equal to the STOP frequency. The vernier and offset can be used
to change the effective center frequency of the sweep. Left FREQUENCY display is start
frequency of sweep; right FREQUENCY display is stop frequency. Frequencies may be
changed in three ways.
® Frequency controls — Provides continuous adjustment. Clockwise rotation increases
frequency.
® Data entry — Can enter specific frequency values from the number/units keyboard.
e Step up/down — enter step size (in GHz or MHZ) using DATA ENTRY keyboard section.
By first pressing the appropriate key (START or STOP) and then the UP or DOWN key can
now increment or decrement the appropriate frequency sweep limit. If a step size has not
been entered the function will change by the default value when UP or DOWN is pressed.
CF (CF/AF)
Puts display in mode where swept output is read as a center frequency and frequency sweep
width. Output is swept from CF—AF/2 (start frequency) to CF+AF/2 (stop frequency). When
changing between CF/ÀF and START/STOP modes only the method of display changes, the
swept REF output remains the same.
When either CF or AF is activated the left display is center frequency (CF), the right display is
delta frequency (AF). Both the CF and AF can be changed via the appropriate control,
number/units keyboard and step size keys.
CW
When activated causes the 8350A to output a constant frequency. The value of the CW frequency
1s displayed on left FREQUENCY display. The CW frequency is the same as the center
frequency (CF) of the previous swept range. The CW frequency value can be changed using the
Figure 3. Frequency Controls (1 of 2)
Model 8350A Local Operation
control, data entry keyboard or step keys. In CW mode, the SWEEP OUT voltage is equal to
percent of full band. Pressing SHIFT, CW enters a “swept” CW mode with the SWEEP QUT
being a 0 to 10 volt ramp that results in the display trace being a flat horizontal line. This is often
useful when reading values (e.g. dB of attenuation) from a CRT screen when ata CW f requency.
FREQUENCY VERNIER
The effective center frequency of any mode (CW or swept) may be adjusted with high resolution
up to £0.05% of the frequency band being used with the vernier. Pressing the VERNIER key
activates the function and sets the left FREQUENCY display to read the vernier value in MHz.
|. "#0" light is on whenever a frequency vernier or frequency offset is present in any mode.
After setting vernier, to return to the previous mode, press the appropriate key (e.g.. START,
CF, etc.) and the display will return to reading the appropriate frequencies and the “3 0”
lamp will be lit.
2. Frequency vernier can be set by the control, data entry keyboard or step keys.
3. The displayed vernier adjustment can be up to £0.05% of the frequency band being swept.
When in a sub-band of a multiband plug-in (for example, the 0.01-2 GHz band of the
83525A 01-84 GHz plug-in) the adjustment range will be £0.05% of the sub-band. This
feature allows for better frequency resolution than would otherwise be possible with the
vernier when using a multiband plug-in.
4. The vernier adds its value to the appropriate frequency parameter and then resets to zero
when the adjustment exceeds 10.05% for continuous adjustment.
5. ZEROING VERNIER. To set the vernier to zero, press VERNIER 0 MHZ/ms and
the #0” lamp will turn off.
FREQUENCY OFFSET
The frequency offset feature allows the CW frequency and/or the effective center frequency of
the swept range to be shifted by any amount up to the full range of the plug-in.
|. To enter an offset press SHIFT VERNIER and enter the offset by either the left
FREQUENCY control or data entry keyboard. The amount of offset (in GHz or MHz) will
be shown in the left FREQUENCY display and the “#40” lamp will be lit.
2. To exit the displayed offset mode press the appropriate mode key (i.e., START, CW, etc).
The sweep limits displayed will appear to be unchanged, however the “# 0” lamp will be on
indicating the offset is present and the actual RF output frequency will be shifted.
3. To return display or adjustment the frequency offset press SHIFT VERNIER . To zero
the offset press SHIFT VERNIER 0 MHz.
OVERRANGE
The 8350A will permit frequency sweeps beyond the specified range of the plug-in by +2.0% of
the plug-in bandwidth. However, plug-in performance in the overrange condition is unspecified.
As a warning of the frequency overrange condition the GHz or MHz annunicator will flicker in
the appropriate function display.
Figure 3. Frequency Controls (2 of 2)
Local Operation Model 8350A
E) 000) e
Er mmm
EMT
Sure CT жет
© e e O
ra =— _ _ o MY Ai -—
ann ———
La La wai
коме AL PA
FREQUENCY/TIME
This display will read either GHz, MHz or sec depending upon the presently active function
and range. This section controls five mainframe markers, manual sweep, and the sweep time.
The fiveindependent frequency markers can be displayed simultaneously as intensified dots on
a CRT using the Z-axis or amplitude dips on the RF output.
SWEEP
Controls the rate at which the RF output is swept.
TIME. When the TIME key is pressed the output is swept at the user-specified or default rate.
If time key 1s it but display reads GHz/MHz or is blank, press TIME key again and display will
read seconds. The mainframe can allow sweep times from 100 seconds to 0.01 second although
the minimum sweep time is dependent on the plug-in being used and bandwidth being swept.
When display reads seconds, sweep time can be adjusted with the control knob or data entry
keyboard. The step keys can be used to adjust the sweep time in a 1-2-5 sequency.
MANUAL SWEEP(MAN). FREQUENCY/TIME display will read GHz/MHz. By using the
FREQUENCY/TIME control, step keys or data entry keyboard, itis possible to manually sweep
the frequency range with the display indicating the present output frequency.
EXTERNAL SWEEP(EXT). The 8350A can be swept via an external voltage. Apply 0 to 10
volts into sweep output/input (can use BNC connector on front or rear panel) with 0Y input
corresponding to the lower frequency limit of the sweep range and 10V corresponding to the
upper limit. DC sweep input voltages will cause CW frequency outputs. Markers and blanking
outputs are disabled when in external sweep mode.
SWEEP TRIGGER
Controls when the sweep will begin in the timed sweep mode. The sweep light, SWP, is lit when
the sweep 15 occurring.
INT. Sweep triggered internally, free running.
LINE. Sweep triggered by power line frequency.
Figure 4. Frequency] Time Controls (I of 3)
Model 8350A Local Operation
EXT. Thesweep can be triggered externally by applying a positive going signal from 0 to 2 volts
minimum, +20 volts maximum to Programming Connector pin 9. The trigger signal must be
wider than 0.5 microsecond at less than a | MHz repetition rate.
SINGLE. This key selects single sweep mode and aborts present sweep when first pressed.
Subsequent keying will trigger or abort single sweeps at current sweep time.
MARKERS
Any or all of the five markers (M1 through M5) may be enabled by pressing the marker key
corresponding to the marker desired. When a marker is activated it is set to its last active
frequency unless INSTRUMENT PRESET has been activated in which case the marker will be
set to the center of the fullband sweep. A marker can be in one of three states:
e ACTIVE — Lamp in center of key flashing.
® ON — Lamp on.
8 OFF — Lamp off.
Only one marker at a time (the “active” marker) can have its value altered. The five mainframe
markers are normally supplied through the positive Z-axis blanking pulses connector on the
rear panel. By pressing the AMPTD MKR key the markers may be displayed as amplitude dips
on the RF output.
® When a marker is active the keyboard, FREQUENCY/TIME control and step keys can be
used to modify 1ts value. The value of the active marker in GHz/MHz is displayed.
® By pressing OFF, the active marker only will be turned off. If multiple markers are on, the
remaining lamps will remain lit although the display will go blank.
® A marker may be initially activated or returned to active state by pressing the corre-
sponding marker key.
® All markers may be turned off simultaneously by pressing SHIFT, OFF.
Example:
Press M3 (Note M3 lamp flashing other lamps off)
Press MS (Note M5 lamp flashing, M3 lamp on and other lamps off.)
MKR (Marker) SWEEP. In this mode the RF outputis swept between markers M1 and M2.
The lamp over the key will be on. Marker | must be less than or equal to Marker 2 in frequency (if
MI is greater than M2 the values of M1 and M2 are permanently interchanged). By varying the
active marker (1 or 2) or by turning the START/STOP controls the sweep limits can be altered.
When both M1 and M2 are not on, the sweep occurs between the most recent values of M1 and
M2. To exit this mode press MKR SWEEP and the lamp over the key will go out. Pressing
SHIFT, MKR SWEEP causes the values of M1 and M2 to become the START/STOP frequency
values permanently.
Figure 4. Frequency/Time Controls (2 of 3)
Local Operation Model 8350A
MARKER-TO-CENTER FREQUENCY (MKR—CF). When this key 15 pressed the
frequency of the active marker becomes the center frequency of the swept output. The frequency
span remains unchanged if within the frequency limits of the plug-in. If original frequency span
exceeds plug-in limits, the frequency span will be reduced to retain symmetry.
MKR A. This function allows tiie frequency difference between any two markers to be
displayed and the trace between them intensified (if intensity markets are selected).
1. Press SHIFT Ml the display shows the frequency difference between the currently
active marker and the one that was previously active.
2. The FREQUENCY/TIME control. keyboard and step keys can change the active marker
value.
3. To exit MKR À mode press OFF.
Example:
|. Press M4 and set frequency via DATA ENTRY keyboard or Control to 2 GHz.
2. ress M2 and set frequency via DATA ENTRY keyboard or Control to 2.4 GHz.
3. Press SHIFT MKR A (Note Frequency/Time display reads difference between
Marker 4 and Marker 2, 400 MHz).
Figure 4. Frequency/Time Controls (3 of 3)
10
Model 8350A
Local Operation
A rrr ro
O LO 000 Se
Aa | E 000 E Sn 5 ‘
srpe {a : Teta LC MODE
957/908 5 aa6 0 (||| BBE 55
a 06 | (=) LOO IN e (=) |
. TE EE aer DER pt E narama mo, e
0008 6806/00066] © ¢ 5
it BOD @ ©“ ©,
SAVEn/RECALLn/ALTn
SAVEn/RECALLn
The 8350A is equipped with memory registers which allow up to nine complete front panel
settings (frequency range, markers, power level, etc.) to be stored and later recalled. Instrument
settings are stored in memory locations 1 through 9 by pressing SAVEn and 1,...,or9. Torecall
a stored instrument setting press RECALLn and 1.....or9. The STEP keys may be used to
step through the stored registers. The instrument settings stored in memory may be recalled
remotely in sequence by using the Step Up Advance on pin 22 of the Programming Connector
on the rear panel of the 8350A. A contact closure to ground or logic 0 is used to implement this
function.
ALTn
ALTn causes the 8350A to alternate between the current instrument state and the setting stored
in memory location n (where n=1, . . . ,9) on successive sweeps. When the 8350A is in this
mode the lamp will be on and the SAVEn and RECALLn keys disabled. To exit from the ALTn
mode press the key again, the lamp wil turn off and the SAVEn/RECALLn keys will become
operational. When using the 8350A with an HP 8755C Swept Amplitude Analyzer, channel 1
displays the current instrument state and channel 2 displays the stored setting (provided the
8350A/8755C ALT SWP INTERFACE cable is connected).
Figure 5. Save n, Recall n, and ALT n Keys
11
Local Operation
sine
FREE
SWEER TR: GER Сура т HE
LIRE [45 me ESO SENSE £17 Wak futé Ro El
D-76006 [606]
DISPLAY FUNCTIONS
AMPTD MKR, DISPL BLANK, RF BLANK. (Function in effect when lamp in center of key 1s
lit)
DISPL BLANK ON/OFF. Blanks the display during the retrace via the POS Z BLANK or
NEG Z BLANK outputs.
RF BLANK ON/OFF. Blanks (turns off) the RF power during the retrace.
LIMOD ON/OFF. Activates the internal 27.8 KHz square wave amplitude modulation of
the RF output. This feature makes the 8350A directly compatible with the HP 8755 Frequency
Response Test Set. The 8350A may be modified via an internal jumper to provide 1000 Hz
square wave amplitude modulation for instruments like the HP 415E SWR Meter (refer to the
Operating and Service Manual, Section 5). £-&|
SWP (Sweep) OUTPUT/SWP (Sweep) INPUT (BNC connection).
SWP (Sweep) OUTPUT. Supplies a 0 to 10 Volt signal when 8350A is in MAN or TIME sweep
mode. OV output is at the start frequency of sweep, 10V output is at the stop frequency of sweep.
In CW mode the output is a dc voltage proportional to the percent of full band. Can be used to
drive the X-axis on a CRT or X-Y recorder.
SWP (Sweep) INPUT. Used when in EXT SWEEP mode. Supplying a dc voltage will tune RF
where 0 volts tunes to the lower frequency of the set sweep and 10 volts tunes to the upper
frequency. The input can be a ramp for a swept output or DC for a CW frequency. The display
and RF blanking must be off when externally sweeping.
12
Figure 6. Display Function Keys
Model 8350A
Model 8350A
Local Operation
E ЗН ©
TE 9 90 ©
83500 SERIES PLUG-IN
Power Control
POWER LEVEL. When pressed, the plug-in display indicates the RF output power. The
output power may be varied using the POWER control, keyboard or step size keys. Note that the
internal leveling must be on and the unleveled light out for calibrated output power. The power
15 typically calibrated over a 15 dB range (80 dB with plug-in Option 002, Step Attenuator).
SLOPE. Compensates for high frequency power losses in external RF cables by increasing the
power at higher frequencies. This compensation provides a flat RF signal output at the end of a
cable or test set. Press SLOPE and the display will indicate the dB per GHz of the present sweep
of compensation desired. Use the POWER control, keyboard or step keys to enter the amount of
slope. Press SLOPE again to remove all compensation.
POWER SWEEP. This function enables the output power to be swept up. The maximum
calibrated power sweep range is typically 10 dB. Note that when using plug-ins with Option 002
Step Attenuator, the power cannot be swept across the internal attenuator switch points. The
procedure for performing a power sweep is:
1. Afterselecting the output frequency (sweep range or “swept” CW mode) use the power level
to set the starting value for the power sweep.
2. Press the POWER SWEEP key, the display will now read the dB/SWP. By using the
POWER control, data entry keyboard or step keys set the desired sweep range. Press the
POWER SWEEP key again to turn the power sweep off.
Figure 7. Plug-in Controls (1 of 2)
13
Local Operation
Signal Control
RF ON/OFF. Turns the RF power on and off.
CW FILTER ON/OFF. When on, this filters the internal oscillator's tuning voltage to provide
a more stable CW or MANUAL SWEEP frequency output. During swept operation this filter is
always disabled.
ALC {Automatic Level Control) Mode: INT, EXT, MTR
INT. Provides internal leveling of output power at the output connector. The 83500 series
Plug-in must be on INT leveling for calibrated output power.
EXT. This setting is used when leveling with an external crystal/diode detector. The front
panel EXT ALC input accepts negative voltages in the —25 to —250 millivolt range (typically).
MTR. Used when leveling output power with an HP 432A/B/C Power Meter.
CAL, Adjusts the ALC gain so the display can be calibrated by an external power meter or
detector.
CRYSTAL MARKERS (83522A, 83525A Plug-ins only)
50. 10, and I MHz crystal frequency marker combs are available. The 50 and 10 MHz are
available at frequencies less than 2 GHz while the 1 MHz markers are available under 1 GHz.
AMPTD/INTENS. The markers can be set to be amplitude dips (on the RF output) and/or
intensified spots (on the Z-axis of the CRT) or both. They are independent of the mainframe
markers.
EXT (External Marker). An external frequency marker can be input through the rear panel
of the plug-in. The marker appears when the RF output frequency equals the marker frequency.
The external marker input power should be between —10 dBm and +10 dBm.
MKR Lamp. When the 8350A is in CW or manual/external sweep mode the MKR Lamp will
hight when the CW frequency is at a marker frequency. Useful when an accurate CW frequency
reference is desired and to calibrate plug-ins.
RF OUTPUT CONNECTOR
Type N female. The 83570A 18 to 26.5 GHz Plug-in is equipped with a WR-42 waveguide output
connector.
14
Figure 7. Plug-in Controls (2 of 2)
Model 8350A
Model 8350A Local Operation
Figure 8. Frequency Response Test Set
INTERFACING THE 8350A WITH SPECIFIC MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT
87555 FREQUENCY RESPONSE TEST SET
The 87535 consist of:
e 8755C Swept Amplitude Analyzer
® [82T Oscilloscope
@ 11664A Detectors (3 each)
e %£(750A Storage-Normalizer
The 8755S 1s used for scalar transmission and reflection measurements requiring up to 60 dB of
dynamic range and for absolute power measurement from —50 dBm to +10 dBm.
The 8350A has the following features designed specifically for use with the 8755S Frequency
Response Test Set:
ВР Square-wave Modulation. By engaging the LA MOD key an internally generated
squarewave modulation of the RF output is available thus eliminating the need for external
modulating equipment. A jumper internal to the 8350A enables the square wave modulation
frequency to be changed to | KHz (see section 5 of the Operating and Service manual for
details).
15
Local Operation Model 8350A
Alternate Sweep Function, The ALTn function of the 8350A allows two different
frequency and power settings to be swept on successive sweeps. The front panel setting and the
setting stored in a memory register location n (n=1,... 9) can be selected for alternate sweeps.
The Alternate Sweep Function will not work properly with the 8755A or 8755B. See Figure 9 fora
sweep display of the ALTn function when used to view a bandpass response at different
resolutions and offsets.
0.25 dB/DIV
10 dB/DIV
Figure 9. Alternate Sweep Function Display
Some other features enhancing the convenience and versatility of the 8755S are:
Marker A. The MKR A function is useful when using alternate sweep in overlapping
different sweep widths. The overlapping portion of one of the sweeps can have an increased
intensity. The 8750A Storage-Normalizer will need to be in BYPASS mode to view Z-axis
modulation on the oscilloscope.
Power Sweep. The RE output power may be ramped up when the sweeper is in the swept or
“swept” CW mode by using the POWER SWEEP function. See Figure 10 for a gain compression
display using power sweep.
Save and Recall. This function allows the storage and recall of nine complete instrument
settings.
AMPLIFIER
GAIN= 15 dB
GAIN
(dB)
POWER
SWEEP
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
POWER IN (dBm)
Figure 10. Gain Compression Display
16
Model 8350A Local Operation
Figure 11 outlines the general procedure used in making a scalar transmission and reflection
measurement. The 116920 Dual-Directional Coupler 1s used in the example but if a 11666A
Reflectometer Bridge 1s available itmay be used instead of the Coupler and two detectors (87558
Option 002).
To keep the following procedure brief the 8750A will not be used (switched to BYPASS) in the
procedure. The following anomalies exist when using the 8750A with the 8350A Sweep
Oscillator:
® The 8350A DISPL BLANK must be engaged to ensure triggering 8750A updating.
® Intensity markers are changed to amplitude markers. In MKR A mode they appear as a
level shift over the MKR A range.
e If an 8755 channel 1s switched off the trace goes to the reference line (bottom of CRT).
17
Local Operation
18
Example:
| Connect the aumenta as s shown i in Figure ||. Initrally, the 8350A should be set by
pressing INSTR PRES Ef and LT MOD (Setto 27.8 KHz) which will set the front
panel instrument state and activate the internal square wave modulation.
g350A SWEEP 63506
_DSCILLATOR — SERIES PLUG-IN
1827
OSCILLOSCOPE
87504
STORAGE: NORMALIZER
POS Z BLANK AUXC
a
ALT SWP OUT | RF OUTPUT aUXO EN eo E
SWR o BO Ë ra
INTERFACE Us 3 нения BE
cu NORMALIZER
FESR я AENA ;
AMPLITUDE ANALYZER | gue» o о зак |
11664A Le goes
mo FAËR dB | ALT
SWF
TA, « 4 INTERFACE
11664A
INCIDENT So
EN
116920 COAXIAL
Г DUAL DIRECTIONAL COUPLER
i
INPUT TREFEECTED
1 164A
Notes on connections:
e Either the front or rear panel SWEEP OUT/IN may be used.
e When in ALTn mode both channels 1 and 2 (on 8755) must be on and receiving
inputs.
2. Turn off channel ! on the 8755C by releasing the display pushbutton. Set the 8350A
controls as desired . On channel 2 set the function, dB/DIV and Offset desired for
viewing the current sweep setting.
3. Set the 8350A controls as desired then store the current 8350A sweep setting in any
available memory location. Then turn off channel 2 by releasing its display
pushbuttons.
4. Turn on Channel 1 of the 8755C and set the function, dB/DIY and Offset as desired.
Set 8350A controls as desired.
5. Turn on channel 2. Press Al in, n and the 8350A will alternate between the two
settings on successive sweeps.
Channel 1 now displays the response due to the current front panel setting while channel 2
displays the response to the setting stored in memory location n. The front panel controis of
the 8350A are enabled and the current sweep setting may be altered if necessary.
Figure 11. Typical Test Setup Using 87558
Model 8350A
Model 8350A
Figure 12. 84108 Network Analyzer
84108 NETWORK ANALYZER
The 8350A 15 compatible with the 8410B Network Analyzer systems and accessories. The Source
Control Cable (HP P/N 08410-60146) synchronizes the two instruments to provide continuous
multi-octave coaxial magnitude and phase measurement capability from 110 MHz to 18 GHz
with 65 dB dynamic range, The frequency markers can be displayed in polar format as intensity
dots (Z-axis). Frequency markers derived from crystal oscillators allow frequency measure-
ments to be made with an accuracy of five parts per million.
Waveguide measurements between 18 and 26.5 GHz can be made with the K8747A
Refiection/ Transmission Test Unit which is designed for use with the 8410B. This test system
utilizes two 8350A Sweep Oscillators and 83570A 18 to 26.5 GHz RF Plug-ins. One sweeper is
used as a local oscillator while the second is used to sweep the desired frequency range.
See Figure 13 for an example measurement set up using the 8410B with a single 8350A and 83500
series Plug-in.
The 8410B FREQ RANGE should be set to AUTO. In addition, the sweep time on the 8350A
should be slow enough and/or sweep range narrow enough to insure phase locking over entire
sweep range.
Local Operation
19
Local Operation Model 8350A
84124
84106 PHASE-MAGNITUDE SI50A SWEEP 83500
NETWORK ANALYZER DISPLAY OSCILLATOR SERIES PLUG-IN
caco REF e = as | 07 sa
ee i | BLANK NEGZ BLANK, |
BE co De IN | SWPINJOUT (60 00 5
SOURCE | _ | fe | RL CE
CONTR | |
ot | ® © ; PROGRAMMING À RF GUIPUT | B1VGHz
ÉS11A INFLT
| 8411A HARMONIC
B418A 8414A FREQUENCY
AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY POLAR DISPLAY AF INPUT ; ji CONVERTER
0 BLANKING
ur a
® se & a el
© ell MARKERS
O:8 e el”
8743A
REFLECTION/TRANSMISSION
TEST SET
Er e 0 4 TT, . ree RRR er
UNKNOWN | D.U.T. |
Figure 13. 8350A Connections to 8410
Notes on connections:
® FREQ REF output of the 83500 or 86200 series Plug-ins provides a 1-volt-per-GHz output
so that the 8410B may synchronize with the sweep.
e The8410B display units (8412A, 8414A) require that the NEG Z BLANK from the 8350A be
used as the blanking signal.
® POS Z BLANK (from the 8350A line contains the Z-axis markers. This line connects to the
MARKERS input on the 8414A Polar Display and to the Z AXIS input on the 8412A
Phase-Magnitude Display.
e SWEEP OUT/IN outputs a0 to +10 volt signal in proportion to the swept or CW frequency
output. OV corresponds to the lower frequency sweep limit; +10V to the upper. Swept RF
output causes a ramp voltage out; CW output causes a dc voltage out. This connection is
necessary only when using 8412A Phase-Magnitude Display.
® 8350A/8410B SOURCE CONTROL CABLE. Provides “handshake” lines for synchroni-
zation between 8350A and 8410B (HP Part No. 08410-60146).
20
Model 8350A Local Operation
X-Y RECORDERS
The 8350A 1s equipped with outputs for controlling X-Y analog recorders.
Some of the HP X-Y recorders that may be used with the 8350A are:
7010B/7015B
7035B
7004B/7034A
7044/7045/7046/7047
The available/required signals for proper operation with an X-Y recorder are:
X INPUT — Typically SWEEP IN/OUT. Supplied by BNC connector on front or rear
panel.
Y INPUT— Y axis voltage. On 8753S Frequency Response Test Set this would be AUX A
for channel 1 or AUX B for channel 2, For 8410B systems, the 8412A display provides
amplitude and phase outputs.
PEN LIFT — Signal line for controlling remote pen up/down. Pen up is open contact or +35
volts. Pen down (current sink) is contact closure to ground or 0 volt. Supplied by BNC
connector on rear panel or pin #10 on 8350A Programming Connector.
RECORDER (SERVO) MUTE — 7044/7045/7047 only. Control line that mutes the power
to the recorder servos for 100 ms at bandswitch (when using multi-band plug-ins) or
designated points. Pin #1 on the 8350A Programming Connector.
PEN LIFT REQUEST — Allows a pen lift to be initiated by remote control independent of
the present pen lift status. Pin #3 on the 8350A Programming Connector.
INVERSE PEN LIFT — Inverse function of Pen Lift, pin #23 on 8350A Programming
Connector.
The pen lift control line is assigned to a pin on the Remote Control connector of the X-Y
recorder. For a complete pin assignment listing refer to the Operating Manual for the particular
X-Y recorder being used.
Pen lift pin location on X-Y recorders:
Recorder Pen Lift Pin No.
TOTOB/7015B 3
7035B 18
7004B/7034A 18
T044A/45A/47A 1
7046A 34
21
Local Operation
22
EA
Figure 14.. 5343 A Microwave Frequency Counter
5343A FREQUENCY COUNTER
The 5343A Microwave Frequency Counter can be used with the 8350A to measure frequencies
in swept mode in addition to normal CW freguency measurements.
During swept operation the 5343A will stop the 8350A sweep and count a selected frequency
parameter such as the START frequency, STOP frequency or any frequency markers in the
sweep range. To accomplish this, the 8350A and 5343A communicate via two signal lines
(Counter Trigger, Stop Sweep on the 8350A and Sweep Interface A and B on the 5343A) that
enable the 8350A to externally trigger the 5343A and then allow the 5343 A to stop the sweep long
enough to gate and count the selected frequency parameter.
See Figure 15 for the test set up.
Measuring CW frequencies
When measuring CW frequencies the CNTR TRIG and STOP SWEEP connections are not
necessary. The 5343 A should be in the AUTO mode and the internal square wave modulation
on the 8350A must be off.
Auxiliary Output
The auxiliary output of an RF Plug-in (if available) may be used with the 3343A. When using the
auxiliary output of a multi-band plug-in such as the 83592A (0.01-20 GHz) the frequency
multiplier feature of the 5343A may be used so that the proper RF frequency 1s displayed.
Model 8350A
Model 8350A Local Operation
5350A SWEEP 83500 5343A MICROWAVE
OSCILLATOR SERIES PLUG-IN FREQUENCY CONVERTER
wn CNTR TRIG SWP INTFC A Caninos п и
anal STOP SWEEP SP NTFCT ОЙ A
OUTPUT
RF QUT
QUTPUT В,
INPUT COUPLED
г ,
DIRECTIONAL COUPLER
Figure 15, 5343A Test Setup
Notes on connections:
® A power splitter or directional coupler may be used as long as the input to the 5343A does
not exceed +7 dBm or go below the minimum sensitivity.
e (CNTR TRIG (Counter Trigger): Output for controlling the HP 5343A Microwave
Frequency Counter. This allows a frequency count of the selected marker, START or
STOP frequency of the present sweep. Connects to the SWP INTFC À (sweep Interface, on
the rear panel of the 5343A) to externally trigger the counter.
® STOP SWEEP: Input for stopping the progress of the forward sweep. When connected to
the SWP INTEC B (sweep interface, on the rear panel of the 5343A) the 5343 A stops the
sweep long enough for the counter to gate and measure the selected frequency marker,
START or STOP frequency. If the internal modulation on the 8350A is on, it is
momentarily disabled so that the counter may measure the frequency.
To measure a START, STOP, or marker frequency during a sweep:
5I43A: Setto AUTO, SWP M and set desired frequency resolution. Set the rear panel ACQ
TIME switch to MED or FAST.
8350A: Select the frequency parameter to be measured by pressing the appropriate key,
START, STOP, or any marker Mn (where n==1,...,5) and then press SHIFT M2
If the sweep setting is changed or it is desired to exit this mode, disable the 5343A by pressing
SHIFT M3 on the 8350A front panel.
Example:
To measure the START frequency.
|. Connect equipment as shown in Figure 15. Set the 5343A to AUTO, SWP M and set
desired frequency resolution.
temporarily stop the « sweep, ‘measure the ‘frequency and display it at the desired
resolution.
23
Local Operation Model 8350A
APPENDIX 1
REAR PANEL CONNECTIONS.
For a diagram of the rear panel see Figure 16.
POS Z BLANK. Positive Z axis blanking signal. Supplies a rectangular pulse of approximately
+3V into 2500 ohms during the retrace and bandswitch points of the RF output. Also supplies a
—3V (—8 volts for active marker) pulse when the RF 1s coincident with a marker frequency if
intensity markers are selected.
NEG Z BLANK. Negative Z-axis blanking signal. Supplies a negative rectangular pulse (—5V
into 2500 ohms) during the retrace and bandswitch points of the RF output.
PEN LIFT. Output to control the pen lift function of an X-Y recorder. Maximum pen-up level is
+40V and maximum pen-down sink current 1s 500 mA (at +0.7V).
SWEEP OUT/IN. Wired in parallel with sweep out/in BNC connector on front panel. See
Display Functions Control group for a description.
CNTR TRIG. Counter Trigger (HP 5343 A Frequency Counter only). Output for controlling the
external trigger input of the HP 5343A frequency counter.
STOP SWEEP. Input for stopping the progress of a forward sweep. When input is 0 to 0.8 volt,
sweep 1s stopped — RF output is a constant CW frequency. Sweep continues when input voltage
returns to greater than 2 volts or open circuit. Usable with the HP 5343 A Frequency Counter and
CNTR TRIG to select and measure frequency points along the sweep.
FM INPUT. Input for frequency modulation or phase lock error signal for the plug-in. This
input is passed through to the plug-in and processed by the plug-in only. See plug-in
specifications for frequency deviation and sensitivity.
AM INPUT. Input for external amplitude modulation of the plug-in. This input is passed
through to the plug-in. See plug-in specifications for amplitude input range.
ALT SWP INTERFACE. Connects via cable HP Part No. 8120-3174 to 8755C to provide
Alternate Sweep function.
PROGRAMMING CONNECTOR. See Figure 16 for pin designation.
24
Model 8350A
Local Operation
ao AFAR
E. ñ Lane:
wi AE wie
AERIAL ARR,
re E
J
Programming
Connector
PROGRAMMING CONNECTOR
Pin No, Description Pin No. Description
1 15 — Marker Pulse (I)
2 — Marker Pulse - (О) Request -
3 — Pen Lift Request (I) 16 — Retrace (O)
4 — Sweep Alternate (O) 17 — Alternate Sweep (О)
5 = Stop Fwd. Sweep (I) Enable
Request 18 — Stop Sweep {I
6 +5 Volt (100 ma MAX) (O) Request |
7 — RF Blanking (О) 19 Digital Ground (1/0)
8 — RF Blank Request (1) 20 — Blanking Pulse (D
9 Ext. Trigger (D Request |
Input 21 — Counter Trigger (O)
10 + Pen Lift (O) 22 — Step Up (D
11 — Recorder Mute (O) 2 — Advance
12 — (O) 23 — Inverse Pen Lift (О)
13 re 24 + 8410 Ext. (0)
lá — Blanking (O) Trigger |
25 —
— Negative Logic (True is logical 9”) (I) Input
+ Positive Logic {O) Output
Figure 16. Rear Panel Connections
25
Local Operation
26
APPENDIX 2:
86200 SERIES PLUG-INS WITH 11869A ADAPTER
: pme
ДА
a
Figure 17. Connecting 118694 Adapter to 86200 series Plug-in
Although designed for the 8620 Sweep Oscillator, the 86200 series RF Plug-ins can be used in the
8350A Sweep Oscillator with the addition of the 11869A Adapter.
The 11869A Adapter provides the electrical and mechanical interface between the 8350A and an
86200 series Plug-in. A switch on the 11869A allows the user to select the appropriate interface
code (from the code listing on the adapter) so that an 86200 series Plug-in can be used in the
8350A.
All of the standard performance and control of the 8350A is available when using an 86200 Plug-
in with the 11869A Adapter. However, plug-in functions (e.g. output power, RF on/off, plug-in
markers) will not be programmable and will not respond to keyboard and step keys. On the rear
panel of the 11869A Adapter are several hole plugs that allow connections to be made to the
back panel of the plug-in. 11869A Option 004 provides two semi-rigid cables to allow connection
of 86200 series rear panel RF cutput to 11869A rear panel.
Special Plug-ins: (Plug-ins with Option HXX)
When using 86200 series Plug-ins that have been factory modified for a non-standard frequency
range, a PROM obtained from the factory must be used in the 11869A Adapter. The PROM 1s
inserted in the 16-pin socket on the PC board of the adapter and is needed for proper interfacing
and controlling of a non-standard plug-in.
Model 8350A
Model 8350A
Local Operation
era. A aaa a as eri aa
REC MH
ESOO = OEE
SOLE | GE
se 30
‚© 300€
Pega aR
мт В
da y
a" Г TE
MUR a
x
mii a ve
oo 1 séa|é SEO €
d ¿doc
. Vernier/Offset. Vernier function offsets sweep
ranges, CW or CF frequencies. #0 lamp lit
when non-zero offset or vernier present.
Right Frequency Control. Adjusts AF or
STOP frequency.
Right Frequency Display. Displays STOP
or AF frequency in GHz or MHz
MKR-A. Allows user to display frequency
difference between any two markers and
intensifies the appropriate portion of the dis-
play.
Frequency/Time Display. Display Marker
or manual sweep frequency in GHz or MHz.
Sweep Time in seconds and HP-IB address.
Markers. Controls the five independent,
mainframe supplied frequency markers.
Save n/Recall n/Altn. Can save and recall
up to nine different settings.
Data Entry Keyboard. Can enter exact
values or step sizes for most sweep parameters
via the keyboard.
. Output Controls. Can control marker dis-
play mode, RF and display blanking and
internal square wave modulation (of the RF
output},
APPENDIX 3
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS SUMMARY
10.
il.
12.
13.
14.
16.
18.
Sweep Mode. Selects External, Manual, or
Timed sweep mode.
MARKER SWEEP. Causes Marker 1 fre-
quency to temporarily become start of sweep,
Marker 2 frequency to become stop of sweep.
Sweep Trigger. Determines how sweep will
trigger.
MEKR— CF. Causes center frequency of sweep
to be shifted to the frequency of the currently
active marker.
Line switch. Turns on/off 8350A mainframe
and plug-in. e
instrument Preset, Selects a pre-determined
instrument state.
START/CF/CW/AF/STOP Sweep mode
keys. Selects mode of output and display.
Left frequency Control. Adjusts START,
CW, CF, VERNIER or OFFSET.
Left Frequency Display. Displays START,
CW, CF, VERNIER or OFFSET frequency in
GHz or MHz, depending on mode selected,
plus self test error codes.
Figure 18. Front Panel Controls
27
a oo eco era e Corona ono os cos
e es O EEE 5 RE mee
Supersedes: None
AUGUST 1980
Introductory
for the HP 8
dscillator
INTRODUCTION
This programming note is a guide to the remote
operation of the HP 8350A Sweep Oscillator and
appropriate HP 83500 Series Plug-in using the HP
9825 Desktop Computers. Included in this guide
are the system connections for remote operation
and several example programs with descriptions of
each step.
The 8350A is fully compatible with the Hewlett-
Packard interface Bus (HP-18). When used with a
controlier such as the 9825, complete control of the
sweep mode, frequency limits, frequency markers,
powerlevel, and all other front panel controls can be
achieved.
REFERENCE ENFORMATICIN
For further formation on the HP Interface Bus, the
following references should prove helpful:
1. Condensed Description of the Hewlett-Packard
Interface Bus (HP Part Number 59401-90030).
2. HP-IB Programming Hints for Selected Instru-
ments/9825 (HP Part Number 59300-90005).
Complete reference information on the 8350A can
be found in the 8350A Sweep Oscillator Operating
and Service Manual (HP Part Number 08350-90001).
For information on operating the 98258 the follow-
ing references are available:
1. 9825B/T Operating, Programming and Control
Manual (HP Part Number 09825-90200).
2. 9825B/T 1/0 Programming Manual (HP Part No.
09825-90210).
If using the 9825A:
1. 98254/5 Operating and Programming Manual
(HP Part No. 09825-90000},
2. 9825A/S General I/O Programming Manual (HP
Part No. 09825-90024).
3. 9825A/S Extended I/O Programming Manual
(HP Part No. 09825-90025).
sierto ica DT ESA EC AO NE EE a UDS rr eee ci A o ero ET ET а кн неаускса к;
ne EEE He EEE de TD UC Ne CNT e Cr
© HEWLETT-PACKARD CO. 1986
лы fd oot to hve ron fiz
FEL Es Sn Ta ET TT TNT UT RN SR
he
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
To perform ail the example programs described in
this programming note, you will need the following
equipment and accessories:
1. HP 8350A Sweep Osciliator with any HP 83500
Series Plug-in. Note that an HP 86200 Series
Plug-in withthe HP 1T1869A Adapter can be used
but all references to power level and power
control are not applicable and some functions
do not have their full capability.
2. HP 9825B/T Desktop Computer (all ROM's are
internal)
Or
HP 9825A/S Desktop Computer with:
a. HP 98210A String-Advanced Programming
ROM
b. HP 98213A or 98214A or 98216A General
1/O-Extended 1/0 ROM
HP 98034A HP-IB Interface Card/Cabie.
NOTE
The following equipment is not required for the
programs to function but rather for a visual
display of the 8350A functions.
HP 87555 Frequency Response Test Set with:
a. HP 8755C Swept Amplitude Analyzer
b. HP 180TR or 1827 Display Unit
c. HP 11664A or 11664B Detector
d. Two 120 cm BNC cables (HP 11170C variety)
or any appropriate oscilloscope with Detector
(Crystal/Schottky), Attenuatorand BNC cabling.
Any test device over the frequency range of the
83500 Series Plug-in.
8350A/83500 PLUG-IN
— WE E
9825
|
JOE) ОО ОВО НОНО
OD O00 Oooo nano
0 OOOO Ci Cd
=
ВОО НОО
E
Fo 1 M3 ООО
a A 98213A* or
I8210A* 98214A* or 98216A*
*9875A onty
Figure 1. System Connection
SET-UP
Figure 1 shows the system connection and switch
settings for the 98034A Interface and the 9825
Desktop Computer. The following procedure com-
pletes the setup:
1. Turn off the power to the 9825,
2. Forthe 9825 Desktop Computer verify that the
ROMS's are installed, If using a 9825A, then
check the front panel slots. If using the 98258
these ROM's are internal and and may have
been disabied by an internal switch,
3. iInstailthe 98034A Interface Card into one ofthe
rear panel slots of the 9825.
4. Verify that the rotary switch on top of the
98034A is setto 7" ifnotthen setitto‘“7” since
this isthe select code forthe interface card for all
programs found within this guide.
5. Connect the 24-pin HP-IB connector of the
98034A to the rear panel HP-IB connector ofthe
8350A. This connector is tapered to insure
proper connection,
CAUTION
Do not attempt to connect black metric threaded
screws on one connector with silver English
threaded nuts on another connector, or vice»
versa, as damage may result. A metric conversion
kit which will convert one cable and one or two
instruments to metric hardware is available by
ordering HP Part No. 5060-0138.
6. Al programs within this guide expect the 8350A
HP-1B address to be decima! 19. The 8350A HP-
IB address switches are located inside the
instrumentandare factory preset to decimal 19.
The present HP-IB address can be found by
executing the front panel ‘Set HP-1B Address’
function by:
The FREQUENCY/TIME display will indicate the
present decimal address. If the number dis-
played is not 19 then reset it by:
Press 1 9 GHz
This HP-1B address will remain in effect until the
instrument is powered off when the internal
address switches are read at power on (uniess
8350A Option 001 Non-volatile Memory is
used). Since Example 4 requires the 8350A to be
powered off and then on, the internal address
switches should be reset to 19 if necessary.
CHECK-OUT
Turn on the 9825 and the 8350A. The 9825 should
have a “lazy T” (+) in the LED display and the
8350A should undergo an internal self test. The
8350A turn-on self test consists of the red LED
numeric displays being blanked and all yellow indi-
cator LED's on, then the 8350A sweep controls are
set to the instrument preset state: Start/Stop Sweep
over the entire plug-in frequency range, fastest
sweep time for plug-in used (typically 10 milli-
seconds), and maximum leveled output power for
the plug-in. If the 8350A fails the power-up self test
an error message will be displayed in the farleft LED
display. Check section 8 of the 8350A Operating
and Service Manual for error message decoding.
To verify that the HP-1B connections and interface
are functional perform the following on the 9825:
1. Press RESET:
2. Type ‘rem 719
3. Press EXECUTE
Verify that the REMote light onthe 8350A is lit, Hf this
fails, verify that the 98034A select code switch is set
to “7”, the 8350A address switches are set to “19”,
and the interface cable is properly connected.
If the 9825 display indicates an error message, it is
possible that the above remote message was typed
in incorrectly or the ROM's are not properly
installed. If the 9825 accepts the remote statement
and the “lazy T” appears in the display but the
8350A REMote light does not turn on, you could
have a defective 98034A or 8350A. Perform the
operational checks as outlined in the respective
Operatingand Service Manualsto find the defective
device.
PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES
The foilowing sample programs show the various
ways of controlling the 8350A. In remote contro!
situations the 8350A Sweep Oscillator can interact
with the system HP-1B controller in two basic ways:
1. “Listen Mode”: The 8350A listens to the control
commands as to modifying the present instru-
ment state. This effectively commands the 8350A
to do a specific event much like setting a front
panel function,
2. “Talk Mode”: The 8350A informs the controller
of the present instrument state with a numeric
value or a string of characters. This effectively
atlows the user to interrogate orlearnany 8350A
function,
Each programming example is structured using the
following format:
1. Ageneral description of the functions exercised.
2. A program listing.
3. An explanation of each program line.
4, Detailed instructions for operating the program.
A complete summary of ali the 8350A HP-1B program
codes is provided at the end of this note.
EXAMPLE PROGRAM I: Remote, Local, Local Lockout, and Instrument Preset
Before programming the 8350A for different sweep
functions, the user should he aware of the extent of
remote control! that can be used. The Remote
Enable (‘rem’) command sets the 8350A into remote
control from the local (manual) mode. Inremote the
8350A will perform only as its functions are pro-
grammed. However if the LCL button is pressed,
the 8350A wiil return to the remote state to local
control, To prevent this from occurring the Local
Lockout (Но) command disables all front panel
controls, specifically the “Local” key. The Go To
Local (Ic) command will return the 8350A to front
panel control thereby removing it from the remote
and local lockout modes. Note that the above
remote and local commands are different from the
general HP-1B bus local and remote commands (Icl 7
and rem 7). Finally, in remote control it is peri-
odically desirable to reset the 8350A to a pre-
defined state, this is achievable with the instrument
Preset function.
PROGRAM 1
PROGRAM $ EXPLANATION
Line 0: Sets 8350A to remote, the 9825 displays
“Remote”, then stops program execution,
Line 1: Sets 8350A to remote and local lockout,
the 9825 displays “Local Lockout”, then
stops program execution.
Line 2: Sets 8350A to local, the 9825 displays
“Local”, then stops program execution.
Line 3: Sets 8350A to remote and performs an
Instrument Preset, then stops program
execution,
To verify and investigate the different remote
modes perform the foilowing:
1. Press RESET £RASE A EXECUTE on the
9825. This erases the program memory.
Press INSTR:PRESET on the 8350A.
Type in the above program,
Press RUN on the 9825.
With the 9825 displaying “Remote”, verify that
the 8350A REMote light is lit. From the front
panel, attempt to change the start frequency
and verify that this is impossible. Verify that the
Instrument Preset key and all other keys except
LCL are disabled. Now press the ‘LCE key and
verifythatthe 8350A REMote light is off and that
you can modify any of the sweep functions.
6. Press CONTINUE on the 9825. With the 9825
displaying” Local Lockout” verify that the 8350A
REMote light is again lit. Again attempt to
change the start frequency and perform an
instrument preset. Verify that this is impossible.
Now press the LCL key and verify that still no
action is taken.
7. Press CONTINUE on the 9825. With the 9825
displaying “Local” verify that the 8350A REMote
light is off. Also verify that all sweep functions
can now be modified via the front panel controls.
8. Press CONTINUE on the 9825. Verify that the
8350A has undergone an Instrument Preset and
the REMote light is on. The Write (‘wrt 719")
statement does two things, one it performs a
‘rem 719, and second it passes data to the
8350A.
Note that the 8350A LCL key produces the same
result as programming cl 719“ or'icl 7”. Be careful as
the latter command places all instruments on the
HP-1B in local state as opposed to the 8350A alone.
EXAMPLE PROGRAM 2: Programming Functions
To program any function on the 8350A the controller
must pass specific program codes and data to the
sweeper, The statement that allows this is the Write
(wrt) statement, The alphanumeric data string of the
write statement can be a concatenation of character
strings and/or variables. The data can be specific
codes, free field formatted data, or reference a
specific format (mt) statement. For example, to.
program the CW Frequency (CW), one program
code sequence is "CW", followed by the frequency
in GHz, then “GZ”. If the frequency is to be 7.555
GHz, then the string “CW7.555GZ” will suffice.
However if the frequency were to change then a
variable ‘F’ could indicate the frequency in GHz and
the program string could be "CW" F*“GZ". Using a
format statement also allows a specific number of
digits to be passed, thereby avoiding any unex-
pected round off errors,
NOTE
This program expects an 83500 Series Plug-in that
covers the frequency 7.555 GHz. [fusing a plug-in
that does not cover this frequency range then the
value in line 1 should be changed to an appro-
priate value,
PROGRAM 2 |
PROGRAM 2 EXPLANATION
Line 0: Puts the 8350A into a predefined state via
instrument preset, then fixes data to 2
decimal places.
Line 1: Puts the 8350A in CW mode and programs
a CW frequency of 7.555 GHz, the 9825
displays “CW == 7,555 GHz”, then stops
program execution.
Line 2: The 9825 displays “CW (in GHz) = ?”. The
user is prompted to input a new CW
frequency value which is stored in the
variable “F'.
Line 3: Print on the internal strip printer the
programmed CW frequency.
Line 4: Program the CW frequency using the
default data format, then go to line 2.
Line 5: Format statement #1 is set up for program-
ming the CW frequency with a 1 MHz
resolution.
Line 6: Program the CW frequency via format
statement #1, then go back to line 2.
The equipment setup is the same as the previous
example. Reset the 9825, erase the 9825 memory,
then type in the above program. Then perform the
following:
1. Press RUN on the 9825. The 9825 displays
"CW = 7,555 GHz”, The 8350A changes from
the instrument preset state of Start/Stop sweep
toa CW frequency of 7.555GHZz.
2. Press CONTINUE on the 9825. The 5825 now
displays “CW {in GHZ) = 17". Type in a
new CW frequency (value in GHz), then press
CONTINUE
3. The 8350A will be programmed to the new CW
frequency with the new value printed on the
internal strip printer, The program jumps back to
step 2. above.
When inputting the CW frequency try several
values, each with a different number of digits after
the decimal point. Notice that the 8350A displays
the frequency to 3 decimal places (1 MHz frequency
resolution). Values with better than 1 MHz fre-
quency resolution are rounded to the nearest MHz
by the 8350A. However when the 9825 is reset all
numeric output data defaults to the ‘fxd 2’ or fixed 2
decimal places format. Thus the 9825 rounds the
desired frequency to the nearest 10 MHz. To
change this free-field format to more decimal places
change the fixed format statement in line 0 to ‘fxd 5’
then re-run the program. Another approach is to
utilize the format statement to set the desired
number of decimal places. To use the format state-
ment in the program perform the following on the
9825:
Press STOP FETCH 4 EXECUTE
then DELETETINE
This should delete line 4 from program #2 and allow
the use of lines 5 and 6 instead. Run the modified
program again and use the same steps for operation
as before. Now if the value inputted has a frequency
resolution greater than T MHz the 9825 does the
rounding instead of the 8350A. This is the preferred
programming approach. Change the format state-
ment for TO MHz frequency resolution and verify
the results from the 8350A frequency display.
Since a device select code address can be a variable
via the Device (dev) statement, verify that this can
be used in the modified or original program #2 by
doing the following:
1. insert before Line 0 a new line using the ‘dev’
command by:
Press STOP FETCH O EXECUTE
Type ‘dev "SWP", 719
Press INSERT LINF
2. Modify the write statement(s) by fetching the
necessary lines, then change the
‘wrt 719" to “wrt “SWP”” and
‘wrt 719.1" to ‘wrt “SWP.17 "7,
3. Re-run the modified program using the same
operation steps as above.
EXAMPLE PROGRAM 3: Setting Up A Typical Sweep
Typically the sweeper is programmed for the proper
sweep frequency range, sweep time, power level,
and marker frequencies for a test measurement,
This program sets up the sweeper for a general
purpose situation using several dedicated format
statements. Note that not all parameters need to be
reprogrammed every time.
NOTE
This program expects an 83500 Series Plug-in that
covers the frequency range of at least 3 to 7 GHz.
if using a plug-in with a different frequency range,
change the values in lines 5, 8, and 9, to the appro-
priate values. If using an 86200 Series Plug-in,
then do not enter Line 6.
PROGRAM 3
ЧЁ
lew aww
A ae ew
PROGRAM 3 EXPLANATION
Line 0: Format statement for setting the Start and
| Stop Sweep frequencies in GHz.
Line 1: Format statement for setting the Sweep
Time in milliseconds. |
Line 2: Format statement for setting a Frequency
Marker by marker number and frequency
in GHz.
Format statement for setting the Output
Power Level in dBm.
Line 3:
Line 4: Preset the sweeper to a known state via
instrument preset and enable the internal
27.8 kHz Square Wave Amplitude
Modulation.
Line 5: Set a Start/Stop Sweep of 3.0 to 7.0 GHz.
Line 6: Set the Sweep Time to 50 msec.
Line 7: Set the Output Power Level to +10 dBm.
Line 8: Set Marker #1 to 4 GHz.
Line 9: Set Marker #2 to 6 GHz, then stops
program execution.
Setup the equipment as shown т figure 2 by adding
the 8755, the 180TR or 182T,the 11664, and a test
device like a 4 to 6 GHz Bandpass Filter. It is
important that the two rear panel connections from
the 8350A tothe 8755C/182T are made fora proper
CRT display. For the example measurement set the
following front panel controls:
On the 8755C:
Channel! 1:
Display ......... OFF {press all the display
push buttons so that they are out)
Channel 2:
Display «o.oo a ea a ee ae as ane 0 B
dB/DIV.L.11022 010044 a ea aa a ea en 0 10 dB
Reference Level .................. -10 dB
Reference Level Vernier.............. OFF
On the 182T or 180TR:
Magnifier ...........e—.. 2.0. 0oirererere.. X1
Display «oe INT
After connecting the equipment: reset the 9825,
erase the 9825 memory, then type in the above
program. Then run the program. The 8350A will
initially undergo an instrument preset which will set
the proper power leveling mode and sweep
blanking signals. Since the 8755C requires the RF
signal to be modulated at a 27.8 kHz rate, the
internal amplitude modulation is enabled. If using a
4 to 6 GHz Bandpass Filter as the test device, the
CRT display should reflect the filter transmission
87558/182T SWEPT
AMPLITUDE ANALYZER
BESKTOP COMPUTER 8350A
ss = POS Z-BLANK AUX "E"
me ва veut § PEER |
= | nee mes [mai Z| BEY о = ЯНВ
EEE sweep ouT/N АНХНО! Пе 8 О 8 о
{Front or Bear) В
DEVICE 11664
UNDER TEST DETECTOR
Figure 2. Equipment Setup For Program 3
response over the 3 to 7 GHz range. Two frequency
markers of the Z-Axis Intensity dot variety are set to
4 and 6 GHz, hopefully within the passband or near
e Y A RADOS E ee ete DA BA Ao
a A a ra
di a YES NA ET LA EY | ВЧ Оо Ann
„Чан ЛЬ TE FE SMA En # ASÍ ! a Ie ый
wr,
Sey GE A
DIE #
the 3 dB points. The setup can be modified by
changing the values in lines 5, 6, 7,8, and/or 9, then
rerun the program.
Being able to save a specific instrument state is
helpful when it is needed several times in a test or
measurement procedure. The user could save the
instrument state by manually logging the important
sweep parameters such as frequency range, power
level, ALC modes, etc., then re-inputting them at the
appropriate time, A somewhat simpler approach is
to save the instrument state in one of the 8350A
internal storage registers, then recall it when needed.
However, this is nota permanent solution uniess the
8350A Non-volatile Memory option (Option 001) is
used. A more permanent solution is to use the
Output Learn String function of the 8350A so that
the 9825 can learn then store a data string that
describes the present instrument state on a tape
cartridge or in its’ internal memory. Once an
instrument state is stored or learned, the 8350A can
then be restored to that state using the Input Learn
String function. The power of these instrument
Learn/Teach functions are demonstrated by the
following program usng the 9825 fast data transfer
function.
PROGRAM 4
AsCii6T So
“Learn” аа. и ВЕНЕ
| 719“ IPHDI"H1e1 Plsiste CE
Sert 719 "0L" | ПО
“arr: 719; “Learn” 0 DO
CAE 125035 Learn‘ )=-Ljate ce
din
pu:
SA
wen aww ва)
Pe ee m
A на
PROGRAM 4 EXFLARATICIN:
line 0: Set the length of the AS string to 116
characters.
Line 1: Set up an I/O buffer named “Learn” that
uses the string A$ for data storage. The
buffer type selected is a byte data, fast
read/write buffer,
Set the 8350A to a predefined state via
instrument preset and enable the square
wave modulation. Return the 8350A to
local control, then stops program execution.
Line 2:
Line 3: Program the 8350A to output the Learn
String.
Line 4: Transfer the Learn String information into
the 9825 data buffer specifying to transfer
only 80 characters.
Line 5: Checkthe status of the buffer to determine
if the transfer is complete, If it is not, then
keep checking the buffer status,
Line 6: Extract the Learn String information from
the buffer by removing the buffer pointers
and re-save only the Learn String in AS.
Line 7:
Line 8:
Stops program execution.
Program the 8350A to accept a new Learn
String, then send the new Learn String to
the 8350A.
Line 9: Stops program execution.
EXAMPLE PROGRAM 5:
Set up the equipment as inexample 3 using the CRT
display to verify the sweep settings. Note that the
original equipment setup can also be used with the
8350A front panel indicators used for verification.
Reset the 9825, erase the 9825 memory, then type
in the above program. Run the program. The 8350A
will undergo an instrument preset, enable the square
wave modulation, then return to local front panel
control. Then perform the following:
1. Adjust the 8350A io a preferred instrument
state, then press CONTINUE on the 9825.
2. Turnthe 8350Aline power off. Wait five seconds
then turn the 8350A power back on. Press
INSTR PRESET on the 8350A.
3. Press CONTINUE on the 9825. Verify on the
CRT display and/or the 8350A that the original
instrument state has been restored.
interrogating The Present Yalue Of A Function
While the 8350A Learn String enables the user to
completely save a string of characters that define
the present instrument state, the information is
densely packed and encoded to save memory space,
Hf the user wishes to determine the actual value of a
specific parameter, say the Start Frequency, It would
require atedious process to extract a numeric value
from several characters within the Learn String. An
easier approach is to use the Output Interrogated
Parameter function of the § 350A. With this function
the 9825 instructs the 8350A to output the present
numeric value of a specified function. Any function
that has a numeric value associated with it (except
Step Size) can be interrogated. Note that if the
parameter is not presently active, the 8350A uses a
computed value or its previous value. The following
program demonstrates the capability of the inter-
rogate function,
PROGRAM 5
43 pri” “Stop. e e
Ta 719 PST dred: car
—"Suyego Tine ="
Pi LOC RAM 5 EXPLANATION
Line 0: Set the 8350A to a predefined instrument
state via instrument preset and enable the
square wave modulation, Return the 8350A
to local control, then stop program
execution,
Line 1: Program the 8350A to output the present
value of the Start Frequency. Read the
value into the 2825 and store it in the
variable ‘A’.
Line 2: Printon the internal strip printer the present
value of the Start Frequency in MHz.
Line 3: Program the 8350A to output the present
value of the Stop Frequency. Read the
value into the 9825 and store it in the
variable ‘B’.
Line 4: Print onthe internal strip printer the present
vaiue of the Stop Frequency in MHz,
Line 5: Program the 8350A to output the present
value of the Sweep Time. Read the value
into the 9825 and store ¡it in the variabie 'T”.
Line 6: Print onthe internal strip printer the present
value of the Sweep Time in milliseconds.
Line 7: Stops program execution.
Set up the equipment as in example 3 using the
analyzer's CRT display to verify the sweep settings.
Note that the original equipment setup can also be
used with the 8350A front pane! indicators used for
verification. Reset the 9825, erase the 9825 memory,
then type in the above program. Run the program.
The 8350A will undergo an instrument preset, enable
the square wave modulation, then return to local
front panel control. Then perform the following:
1. Adjust the 8350A to a preferred instrument
state using the Start Frequency, Stop Freuency,
and Sweep Time controls.
2, Press CONTINUE on the 9825,
а.
EXAMPLE PROGRAM 6: A Stepped UW Sween
3. The present values ofthe Start Frequency, Stop
Frequency, and Sweep Time are sequentially
interrogated and then printed on the internal
strip printer of the 9825.
Present automatic measurement systems typicaily
make measurements at a sequence of CW test
frequencies instead of analog sweeping the fre-
guency range of interest. If swept, the measurement
data taking machine would need to sample the RF
signal at a very fast rate to maintain accurate
frequency information, too. This is typically not
accomplished. Stepped CW sweeps can be accom-
plished in several ways with the 83504:
1. Program sequential CW test frequencies.
2. Program the frequency sweep range then
| enable the manual sweep mode. Perform a
stepped manual sweep by repetitively pro-
gramming the step up/increment function.
3. Program the CW frequency to the start fre-
quency, the Step Size to an appropriate value,
then repetitively program the step up/incre-
ment function,
Considering the speed of programming the above
approaches, the third is the most efficient time wise,
This program illustrates a stepped sweep using this
approach,
PROGRAM 6
PROCGRAM & CAPLANATION
Line 0: Set the 8350A to a predefined instrument
state and enable the square wave
modulation.
Line 1: The 9825 displays “Start Freq (GHz) = 77,
input prompts for start frequency of the
sweep. Store it in the variable ‘A’,
Line 2: The 9825 displays “Stop Freq (GHz) = 77,
input prompts for the stop frequency of the
sweep. Store it in ‘B’,
Line 3: The 9825 displays “Step Size (GHz) = ?”,
input prompts for the step size of the
sweep, Store itin 'C.
Line 4: Determine the number of frequency steps
in sweep, store in ‘D’.
Line 5: Set the CW Step Size,
Line 6: Setthe CW frequency tothe start frequency
value,
Line 7: lterate the CW step 'D' times.
Line 8: Program the Step Increment/Up function,
then wait 20 msec for settling.
Line 9: Continue step iteration, then go to line 6.
The equipment setup is the same as in the previous
example. Reset the 9825, erase the 9825 memory,
then type in the above program. Run the program.
The 8350A will undergo an instrument preset and
enable the square wave modulation. Then perform
the following:
1. The 9825 will display “Start Freq (GHz) = ?”.
Answer this prompt by inputting the desired
Start frequency (value in GHz) of the sweep,
then press CONTINUE
2. The 9825 will display “Stop Freg (GHz) = 7”,
Answer this prompt with the desired Stop
frequency {in GHz) of the sweep, then press
3. The 9825 will display “Step Size (GHz) = ?”.
Answer this prompt with the desired Step size
(in GHz) of the sweep, then press CONTINUE
4, The 8350 CW frequency will be programmed to
the Start frequency of the sweep selected. Then
the CW frequency is repetitively incremented
by the step size value. The sweep is then
restarted after reaching the stop frequency.
To stop the program press STOP or RESET.
Part of the time involved in changing CW fre-
quencies is updating the numeric LED dispiay, This
time can be reduced by blanking the numeric
display via the Display Update On/Off function.
This can be impiemented by modifying line 0 to: wrt
719, “IPMD1DU0”, Re-run the modified program.
A dat dr de a Ya QE AUS Му OR en wom m
eS RL EEE ETA OA O PU EURO PA mi Po Ë A,
Ee BOGE PREECE Be SI E Ed ne PATES 270 E E “a ETE
E PA PURA A Ea hdl ROHR nF EN
E
Certain error conditions of the 8350A can be
detected by the 9825 so that corrective action can
be taken. Examples of some detectable error condi-
tions are RF power unleveled, numeric data entry
out of range, and line power failure. If an error
condition exists, the user can instruct the 8350A to
request service from the 9825 by initiating a Service
Request (SRQ). The 9825 can detect whether an
SRQ has taken place on the bus by analyzing bit 7
(see note) of the Status Byte of the 98034A HP-IB
Interface. Two modes are available for analyzing the
98034A Status Byte: 1) periodically read the Status
Byte, or 2) enable bit 7 to interrupt the program
when it is set. In either case, once it is determined
that the 8350A has requested service, the specific
error condition(s) can then be determined by
reading and analyzing the Status Bytes of the 8350A.
The 8350A has two Status Bytes, each consisting of 8
bits with each bit indicating the present status of a
particular function or condition. See Table 1 for a
complete description of the conditions associated
eB an bi ph pee EE a sem ne en ee с
Foe dR WP ERB RY
dE a ta i,
Ge Er e BE py een ge
SEAS BYES,
ame Request Mask
with each Status Byte bit. The user can analyze these
Status Bytes for every SRQ, or more simply, instruct
the 8350A to issue an SRQ only if a specific set of
error conditions exists. The set of conditions is
determined by a numeric value passed by the
Request Mask function, This numeric value is
generated by summing the decimal values of each
Status Byte bit to be checked. This program demon-
strates the capability of the SRQ and Status Bytes to
detect an error condition.
NOTE
This assumes that the status bits are numbered 0
thru 7 with the least-significant bit being number
8. Other references may assume that the bits are
numbered 1 thru 8 with the least-significant bit
being number 1. |
If using an 86200 Series Plug-in, the Status Bytes
can provide only limited information. Table 1
indicates which Status Byte function/bits are
usable,
Table 1. 8350A Status Byte Descriptions
STATUS BYTE (#1)
BITA | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4
DECIMAL
VALUE 128
Front Panel REQUEST
SRQ —— SERVICE
REQUEST RQS)
FUNCTION | [SRQ a on.
| | Syntax
| Error:
| | sre on.
4 End of
+ | sweep и | AAA
SRQ or |srQon |
Change in I Numeric
Extended - Len ' .
[| [Soe Compe | rasa
ts RQ 6 on" srqo on
“RF Settled |
Brg | 7 | 6 | 5 |
EXTENDED STATUS BYTE (#2)
DECIMAL
VALUE
128 | … о ' — | o = f BO 4 a FA
FUNCTION — E
Во Unleveled à [raie |
N/A | | |
RE
Unlocked |
Tun | self: Test
‚Failed.
| External | *OvenCol
“Over
Tea Ref. LE SIRET Modulation |
Selected : e
*Bit/Functions not usable with 867200 Series Plug-ins and 11869%A Adapter.
10
PROGRAM 7 Ÿ
“gs cli 7ielr 7195urt” PAS емы |
Aoi 75 'SRO”. DE SL Te Tdi
ed: ‘75128 ES -
ent CU Frea. (GHZ) Coop DIS
ACNE 7195 "CH" 2 E
55 wait 100 сл EE =
— 71 “SRO": rds (71955 ERA Teh
NA bitcesfAy=Bieto.- 4 | e
CBT BittB-R)=ifert- “Value: Altered”
181 4f bit (5.FD= "Арго “Syntax. Error”
“418 clr 719 POSE
ge ‘gir AE e
1 432644" SP В
PROGRAM 7 EXPLANATION
Line 0: Clear the status of the HP-IB and the
8350A. Preset the 8350A to a predefined
instrument state and enable the square
wave modulation.
Line 1: Indicate that if an interrupt from the
98034A HP-IB Interface is received that
program execution will branch to the
interrupt service routine located atthe line
labelled “SRQ".
Line 2: Enablethe controllerto acceptan interrupt
from the 98034A if bit 7 (decimal value
128) is set.
Line 3: The 9825 displays “CW Freq (GHz) = 77,
input prompts for the desired CW fre-
quency value in GHz, Store it in the
variable ‘F.
Line 4; Setthe CW frequency as determined by ‘F.
Line 5: Wait 100 milliseconds to allow the 8350A
to interrupt.
Line 6: Go to line 3.
Line 7: Location of the interrupt service routine.
Read the Status Byte of the 8350A and
store it in ‘A’,
Line 8: Check bit 6 ofthe 8350A Status Byte to see
if it generated the SRQ, go to line 12 if not.
Line 9: Check bit 0 of the 8350A Status Byte for a
Parameter Value Altered error indication,
Print on the interna! strip printer “Value
Altered” if one exists,
Line 10: Check bit 5 of the 8350A Status Byte for a
Syntax error. Print on the internal strip
printer “Syntax Error” if one exists,
Line 11: Clear the 8350A status to enable another
SRO.
Line 12: Re-specify and re-enable interrupts from
bit 7 of the 98034A, return from the inter-
rupt service routine to the main program.
The equipment setup is the same as the previous
example. Reset the 9825 memory, then type in the
above program. Run the program. The 8350A will
undergo an instrument preset and enable the
square wave modulation. The 9825 then displays
“CW Freq (GHz) = ?”. Answer this prompt by
inputting the desired CW frequency in GHz, then
press CONTINUE. Verify that the 8350A CW
frequency has been properly programmed. Try
several values that are out of range of the plug-ins
frequency limits and verify that an error message
was printed on the strip printer. The program
repeats the above input prompt. To stop the
program press STOP or RESET.
+ NOTE
For Program 7 to function properly, change line 0 to:
O: cli7; cir 7197 wrt 719, “IPMDIRM” & char (97). This
change enables status bit 5 (SRQ on Syntax Error) and
bit 0 {(SRQ on Numeric Parameter Altered to Default
Value).
APE PROGRAM CODES
CODE DESCRIPTION CODE DESCRIPTION
AKm Amplitude Marker On/Off MZ MHz
Almn Alternate Sweep On/Off MO Marker Off
АЛ Internal Leveling M1 Marker #1
А2 External Crystal Leveling M2 Marker #2
A3 External Power Meter Leveling M3 Marker #3
BK Backspace M4 Marker #4
CAm Amplitude Crystal Marker On/Off (83522/| > Markers
83525 Only) NT Network Analyzer Trigger (8410B)
CF Center Frequency OA Output Active Parameter
Cim Intensity Crystal Marker On/Off (83522/ OL Output Learn String
83525 Only) OM Output Mode String
CW CW Frequency OP Output Interrogated Parameter
C1 1 MHz Crystal Marker Frequency (83522/1 os Output Status Bytes
83525 Only) OX Output Micro Learn String
C2 10 MHz Crystal Marker Frequency (83522/
83525 Only) PL Power Level
C3 50 MHz Crystal Marker Frequency (83522/j PSM Power Sweep On/Off
83525 Only) RCn Recall Register
C4 External Crystal Marker Frequency (83522/ | RFm RF Power On/Off
83525 Only) RM Service Request Mask
DF Delta F Frequency Span RS Reset Sweep
DM dBm SC Seconds
DN Step Down/Decrement SH Shift Function
DPm Display Blanking On/Off SEm Slope On/Off
DUm Display Update On/Off SM Manual Sweep
E Exponent Power Of 10 55 Step Size
FA Start Frequency ST Sweep Time
FB Stop Frequency SVn Save Register
Fim CW Filter In/Out SX External Sweep
GZ GHz TS Take Sweep
HZ Hz 11 Internal Sweep Trigger
: 12 Line Sweep Trigger
IL Input Learn String T3 External Sweep Trigger
IP Instrument Preset TA Single Sweep
IX Input Micro Learn String
KZ KHz UP Step Up/Increment
MC Marker To Center Frequency VR CW Vernier
MDm Square Wave Amplitude Modulation
On/Off
MO Marker Off |
MPm Marker 1-2 Sweep On/Off
MS Milliseconds 0—9 + — Acceptable Numeric Data
NOTES
1. Program codes of the form “XXm” use “m” to turn the function On or Off (1 or 0). For the storage register
functions the “n” is T through 9.
2. The 8350A ignores spaces, plus signs, negative signs (except for vernier, offset, and power values), and any
unexpected characters. Program codes can be upper or lower case alpha characters.
For more information, call your local HP Sales Office or nearest Regional Office: Eastern (201) 265-3000; Midwestern (312) 255-5800: Southern (404) 955-1500: Western (7213)
978-7500; Canadian (415) 678-5430, Ask the operator for instrument sales. Or write Hewlett-Packard, 1561 Page Mill Read, Pato Alto, CA 94304, In Europe: Hewlett-Packard
S.A,, 7, rue du Bois-du-Lan, PO. Box, CH 1217 Meyrin 2, Geneva, Switzerland. In Japan: Yokogawa-Hewlett-Packard Ltd., 29-21, Takaido-Higashi 3-chome, Suginami-ku, Tokyo 168.
5952-9302
Printed in ULSA.
LE SIGHEE FOR,
. x MB i> > E
SYSTEMS
8350A/9835A-1
Supersedes: None
Y: E
Introductory
for the HP
with the HP 9835A |
Guide
Jscillator
desktop Computer
INTRODUCTION
This programming note is a guide to the remote
operation of the HP 8350A Sweep Oscillator and
appropriate HP 83500 Series Plug-in using the HP
3835A Desktop Computer. Included in this guide
are the system connections for remote operation
and several example programs with descriptions of
each step.
The 8350A is fully compatibile with the Hewlett
Packard Interface Bus (HP-1B). When used with a
controller such as the 9835A, compiete contro! of
the sweep mode, frequency limits, frequency
markers, power level, and all other front panel
controls can be achieved.
REFERENCE INFORMATION
For further information on the HP interface Bus, the
following reference should prove helpful:
e Condensed Description of the Hewlett-Packard
Interface Bus (HP Literature No. 59401-90030).
Complete reference information on the 8350A can
be found in the 8350A Sweep Oscillator Operating
and Service Manual (HP Part No. 08350-90001). For
information on operating the 9835A the following
references are available:
e 9835A Operatingand Programming Manual (HP
Part No. 09835-90000).
® 9835A 1/0 ROM Programming Manual (HP Part
No. 09835-90060).
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
To perform all the example programs described in
this programming note, you will need the following
equipment and accessories:
1. HP 8350A Sweep Oscillator with any HP 83500
Series Plug-in. Note that an HP 86200 Series
Plug-inwith the HP 11869A Adapter can be used
but all references to power level and power
control are not applicable.
2. HP 9835A Desktop Computer with:
a. НР 98332A 1/0 ROM (actually 4 ROMs)
—b. HP 98034A Revised HP-1B Interface Card/
Cable
@HEWLETT-PACKARD СО. 1980
NOTE
The following equipment is not required for the
programs to function but rather for a visual
display of the 8350A functions.
3. HP 87555 Frequency Response Test Set with:
HP 8755C Swept Amplitude Analyzer
HP 180TR or 1827 Display Unit
HP 11664A or 116648 Detector
Two 120 cm.{4 ft.) cables (HP 11170C type).
ON US
or any appropriate Oscilloscope with Crystal/
Schottky Detector, Attenuator, and BNC Cabling.
4. Any test device over the frequency range of the
83500 Series Plug-in.
SET-UP
Figure 1 shows the system connection and switch
settings for the 98034A interface and the 9835A
Desktop Computer. The following procedure com-
pletes the setup:
1. Turn off the power to the 9835A.
Verify that the ROMs are installed in the 9835 A.
If not, then install the ROMs inan unused ROM
drawer then insert the drawer in one of the front
panel stots of the 9835A
Instailthe 98034A interface Card into one ofthe
rear panel slots of the %835A.
Verify that the rotary switch on top of the
98034Aissetto”7". linoctthensetitto”7" since
this is the select code for the Interface card for ail
programs found within this guide,
Connect the 24-pin HP-IB connector of the
98034A to the rear panel HP-1B connector of the
8350A. This connector is tapered to insure
proper connection.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to mate black metric threaded
screws on one connector with silver English
threaded nuts on another connector, or vice-
versa, as damage may result. A metric conversion
kit which will convert one cable and one or two
instruments fo metric hardware is available by
ordering HP Part No. 5068-0138.
HP INTERFACE BUS
8350A/83500 PLUG-IN
98034A
Py,
ce
Loe
LS
Lt
9835A
EICHE Ty oan Doon
121030 [389 CICICIES rel
ГНО оО
DEIN CE 5 6 т 1 Но
DEZE ELLE) Lio СРД
DO 000000 Оо ВЕ НО
с С 3
o A
Е E
9833ZA
Figure 1. System Connection
2
6. All programs within this guide expect the 8350A
HP-18 address to be decimal 19. The 8350A HP-
|B address switches are located inside the in-
strument and are factory preset to decimal 19,
10 execute a front panel ‘Set HP-IB Address’
which will display the present HP-IB address:
Press SHIFT LCL
The FREQUENCY/TIME display will indicate the
present decimal address. To reset the number if
19 is not displayed:
Press 1 9 GHz
This HP-1B address will remain in effect until the
instrument is powered off since the internal
address switches are read at power on {unless
8350A Option 001 Non-volatile Memory is
used). Since Example 4 requires the 8350A to be
powered off then on, the internal address
switches should be reset to 19 if necessary.
CHECK-OUT
Turn on the 9835A and the 8350A. The 9835A
should undergo an internal memory test then
display “9835A READY FOR USE” on the CRT
display. The 8350A should also undergo a turn-on
self test consisting of the red LED numeric displays
being blanked and all vellow indicator LED's on,
then the 8350A sweep controls are set to the
instrument preset state: Start/Stop Sweep over the
entire plug-in frequency range, fastest sweep time
for plug-in used (typically 10 milliseconds), and
maximum leveled output power for the plug-in. If
the 8350A fails the power-up self test an error
message will be displayed in the far left LED display.
Checksection 8 of the 8350A Operating and Service
Manuai for error message decoding and diagnostics.
To verify that the HP-IB connections and interface
are functional perform the following on the 9835:
1. Press CONTROL STOP (or RESET )
2. Type REMOTE 719'
3. Press EXECUTE
Verify that the REM light on the 8350A is lit. If this
fails, verify that the 98034A select code switch is set
to “7”, the 8350A address switches are set to “19”,
and the interface cabie is properly connected.
lf the 9835A display indicates an error message, it is
possible that the above remote message was typed
in incorrectly or the ROM's are not properly
installed. If the 9835A accepts the remote state-
ment and the display is clear but the 8350A REM
light does not tun on, you could have a defective
98034A ог 8350A. Perform the operational checks
as outlined in the respective Operating and Service
Manuals to find the defective device.
PROGEAMMING EXAMPLES
The following sample programs show the various
ways of controlling the 8350A. In remote control
situations the 8350A Sweep Oscillator can interact
with the system HP-1B controller in two basic ways:
1. “Listen Mode”: The 8350A listens to the
control commands as to modifying the present
instrument state. This effectively commands the
8350A to do a specific event much like setting a
front panel function,
2. "Talk Mode”: The 8350A informs the
controller of the present instrument state with a
numeric value or a string of characters, This
effectively allows the user to interrogate or learn
any 8350A function.
Each programming example is structured using the
following format:
1. Ageneral description of the functions exercised.
2. The program listing.
3. An explanation of each program line.
4. Detailed instructions for operating the program.
CAAMPLE PROGRAM 1: Remote, Local, Local Lockeut and Instrument Preset
Before programming the 8350A for different sweep
functions, the user should be aware of the extent of
remote control that can be used. The Remote
Enable (REMOTE) command sets the 8350A into
remote control from the local (manual) mode. In
remote the 8350A will perform only as its functions
are programmed. However if the LCL button is
pressed, the 8350A will return from the remote state
to local control. To prevent this from occurring the
Local Lockout (LOCAL LOCKOUT) command
disables all front panel controls, specifically the
“Local” key. The Go To Local (LOCAL) command
will return the 8350A to front panel control thereby
removing it from the remote and local lockout
modes. Note that the above remote and local
commands are different from the general HP-1B bus
local and remote commands {LOCAL 7’ and
"REMOTE 7”). Finally, in remote control it is рег
odically desirable to reset the 8350A to a pre-
defined state, this is achievable with the Instrument
Preset function.
PROGRAM 1
PROGRAM T EXPLANATION:
Line 10: Sets 8350A to remote.
Line 20: The 9835A displays “Remote”.
Line 30: Temporarily stops program execution.
Line 40: Sets 8350A to remote.
Line 50: Sets local lockout mode.
Line 60: The 9835A displays “Local Lockout”.
Line 70: Temporarily stops program execution.
Line 80: Sets 8350A to local.
Line 90: The 9835A dispiays “Local”,
Line 100: Temporarily stops program execution.
Line 110: Sets 8350A to remote and performs an
Instrument Preset.
Line 120: Stops program execution.
To verify and investigate the different remote
modes do the following:
EXAMPLE PROGRAM 2: Programming Functions
Type i in the above program.
Press RUN on the 9835A.
With the 9835A displaying” Remote”, verify that
the 8350A REM light is lit. From the front panel,
verify that the start frequency cannot be
changed. Verify that the INSTR PRESET key and
all other keys except LCL are disabled. Now
pressthe LCL
(+: 4 4 NN
CL key and verifythatthe 8350A REM
light is off and that you can modify any of the
sweep f functions.
CONTINUE on the 9835A. With the
9835A displaying” Local Lockout” verify that the
8350A REM light is again lit. Again attempt to
change the start frequency and perform an
instrument preset. Verify that this is impossible.
Now press the LCL key and verify that still no
action is taken,
CONTINUE on the 9835A. With the
9835A displaying “Local” verify that the 8350A
REM light is off. Also verify that ali sweep
functions can now be modified via the front
panel controls,
€ JE onthe 9835A. Verifythat the
83 SOA A has undergone an Instrument Preset and
the REM light is on. The Output (OUTPUT 719’)
statement does two things, one it performs a
"REMOTE 719’, and second it passes data to the
8350A.
Note that the 8350A LCL key produces the same
resultas programming 'LOCAL719" or'LOCAL7'. Be
careful as the latter command places all instruments
on the HP-1B in local state as opposed to the 8350A
alone,
To program any function on the 8350A the con-
troller must pass specific program codes and datato
the sweeper. The statement that allows this is the
Output (OUTPUT) statement. The alphanumeric
data string of the output statement can be a
concatenation of character strings and/or variables.
The data can be specific codes, free field formatted
data, or reference a specific image ( IMAGE) state-
ment. For example, to program the CW Frequency
(CW), one program code sequence is “CW”, the
frequency in GHz, “GZ”. If the frequency is to be
7.555 GHz, then the string “CW7.555GZ” will
suffice. However if the frequency were to change
then a variable 'F could indicate the frequency in
GHz and the program string could be “CW”,F,“GZ”,
Using an image statement also allows a specific
numberof digits to be passed, thereby avoiding any
unexpected round off errors,
NOTE
This program expects an 83500 Series Plug-in that
covers the frequency 7.555 GHz. If using a plug-in
that does not cover this frequency range then the
value in lines 30 and 40 should be changed to an
appropriate value.
: PROGRAM 2
PROGRAM 2 EXPLANATION:
Line 10: Puts the 8350A into a predefined state
via instrument preset.
Line 20: Fixes numeric data output to 2 decimal
places.
Line 30: Puts the 8350A in CW mode and pro-
grams a CW frequency of 7.555 GHz.
Line 40: The 9835A displays “CW = 7.555 GHz”.
Line 50: Temporarily stops program execution.
Line 60: The 9835A displays “CW (in GHz) =?",
The useris prompted to input anew CW
frequency value which is stored in the
variable 'F,
Line 70: Printonthe CRT display the programmed
CW frequency.
Line 80: Program the CW frequency using the
default data format.
Line 90: Go to line 60.
Line 100: Image statement is set up for program-
ming the CW frequency with a 1 MHz
resolution.
Line 110: Program the CW frequency via image
statement in line 100.
Line 112: Go to line 60.
The equipment setup is the same as the previous
example. Reset the 9835A, scratch the 9835A
memory, then type in the above program. Then do
the following:
1. Run the program. The 9835A displays “CW =
7.555 GHz”. The 8350A changes from the
instrument preset state of Start/Stop sweep to a
CW frequency of 7.555 GHz.
2. Press CONTINUE on the 9835A. The 9835A
now displays “CW (in GHz) ==?". Type in a new
CW frequency (value in GHz), then press
3. The 8350A will be programmed to the new CW
— frequency with the new value printed on the
CRT display. The program jumps back to step (2)
above.
When inputting the CW frequency try several
values, each with a different number of digits after
the decimal point. Notice that the 8350A displays
the frequency to 3 decimal places (1 MHz frequency
resolution). Values with better than 1 MHz fre-
quency resolution are rounded to the nearest MHz
by the 8350A. However when the 9835A is reset all
numeric output data defaults to the "FIXED 2’ or
fixed 2 decimal places format. Thus the 9835A
rounds the desired frequency to the nearest 10
MHz. To change this free-field format to more
decimal places modify the fixed format statementin
line20 to FIXED 5' then re-run the program, Another
approach is to utilize the image statement to set the
desired number of decimal places. To use the image
statement in the program, do the following on the
9835A:
Press STOP
Type “DEL 80, 907
This should delete lines 80 and 90 from program #2
and allow the use of lines 100, 110, and 120 instead.
Run the modified program again and use the same
steps for operation as before. Now if the value
inputted has a frequency resolution greater than 1
MHz the 9835A does the rounding instead of the
8350A. This is the preferred programming approach.
Change the image statement for 10 MHz frequency
resolution and verify the results from the 8350A
frequency display.
Since a device select code address can be a variable,
verify that this can be used in the modified or
original program #2 by doing the following:
1. Insert before Line 10 a new line with the variable
'Swp” by:
Type '5 Swp=719"
Press STORE.
2. Modify the output statement(s) by editing the
necessary lines and changing the
"OUTPUT 719" to "OUTPUT Swp’ and
"OUTPUT 719 USING 100’ to
"OUTPUT Swp USING 1007.
EXAR APPLE PROGRAM % Setting Up 4 Typical ©
3. Re-run the modified program using the same
operation steps as above.
> WET
Typically the sweeper is programmed for the proper
sweep frequency range, sweep time, power level,
and marker frequencies for a test measurement.
This program sets up the sweeper for a general
purpose situation using several dedicated image
statements. Note that not all parameters needto be
reprogrammed every time.
NOTE
This program expects an 83500 Series Plug-in that
covers the frequency range of at least 3 to 7 GHz.
If using a plug-in with a different frequency range,
change the values in lines 60, 90, and 100, to the
appropriate values, If using an 86200 Series Plug-
in then do not enter line 70.
PROGRAM 3
MAGE “FA”, ED. LIED, "GFE, DD. 00D, "OZ
EE ET pion, AMS ЛЕН
= 3 Mun n De TD, TDT; "E HL cz n ; . ri N ; ; я - : Do : ; ; ; 5 -
BS CEL BDDC A
50 OUTFUT 713; MIPMDIA RS
£8. OUTPUT 713. USING 1873, PES
CBE OUTPUT 715 USING mise
SE nN D BUTFUF. В 15 USING 30; 1,4" 7 on e = 5 | AE с
e e USING 8872,8 000
MC PSE EE SES
PROCRAM 1 EXPLAMATION:
Line 10: Image statement for setting the Start
and Stop Sweep frequencies in GHz.
Line 20: Image statement for setting the Sweep
Time in milliseconds.
Line 30: Image statement for setting a Frequency
Marker by marker numberand frequency
in GHZ,
Line 40: Image statement for setting the Output
Power Level in dBm,
Line 50: Presetthe sweeper to a known state via
instrument preset and enable the inter-
nal 27.8 kHz Square Wave Amplitude
Modulation.
Line 60: SetaStart/Stop Sweep of 3.0 to 7.0 GHz.
Line 70;
Line 80:
Set the Output Power Level to +10 dBm,
Set the Sweep Time to 50 milliseconds.
Set Marker#1 to 4 GHz.
Set Marker#2 to 6 GHz.
Line 90:
Line 100:
Line 110: Stop program execution.
Set up the equipment as shown in Figure 2 by
adding the 8755C, the 180TR or 182T, the 11664,
and atest device like a4 to 6 GHz Bandpass Filter. It
is important that the two rear panel connections
from the 8350A to the 8755C/182T are made for a
proper CRT display. For the example measurement
set the following front panel controls:
On the 8755C:
Channel 1:
Display..... OFF (press all the display push
buttons so that they are all out)
Channel 2
Display .............e......0ríímereze. B
dB/DIV ue... PU 10 dB
Reference Level .......... eee... —10 dB
Reference Level Vernier............ OFF
On the 182T or 180TR:
Magnifier ....... KERLE X1
Display «coo aa ea aa a ra ea a 0 INT
After connecting the equipment: reset the 9835A,
scratch the 9835A memory, then type in the above
program. Then run the program. The 8350A will
initially undergo an instrument preset which will set
the proper power leveling mode and sweep blanking
signals. Since the 8755C requires the RF signal to be
modulated ata 27.8 kHz rate, the internal amplitude
modulation is enabled. !f using a 4 to 6 GHz
Bandpass Filter as the test device, the CRT display
should reflect the filter transmission response over
the 3 to 7 GHz range. Two frequency markers of the
Z-Axis intensity dot variety are set to 4 and 6 GHz,
hopefully within the passband or near the 3 dB
points. The setup can be modified by changing the
values in fines 60, 76, 86, 90, and/or 100, then re-run
the program.
8755C/ 1821 SWEPT
9835A 83504 AMPLITUDE ANALYZER
DESKTOP COMPUTER SWEEP OSCILLATOR
== “= POS Z BLANK
ЗВОЗАА 15 0.5: O e El LO aves | SWEEP OUT/IN
(FRONT OR REAR)
FOE
BE SEES
+ BEER
SO
DEVICE
UNDER TEST 11684
DÉTECTOR
Figure 2. Equipment Setup For Program 3
EXARAPLE PROGRAM 4: Learning An Instrument State
Being able to save a specific instrument state is PROGRAM 4 EXPLANATION:
helpful when it is needed several times in a test or . . . .
e piu: when it Is ne a test Line 10: Define the first element in any array to
measurement procedure. The user could save the .
. : , be at index number 1.
instrument state by manually logging the important
sweep parameters such as frequency range, power Line 20: Set the length of the A$ string to 100
level, ALC modes, etc, then re-inputting them at the
appropriate time, A somewhat simpler approach is
to save the instrument state in one of the 8350A
internal storage registers, then recall it when needed.
However, this is not a permanent solution
unless the 8350A Non-volatile Memory option
(Option 001) is used. A more permanent solution is
to use the Output Learn String function ofthe 8350A
so that the 9835 A can learn then store a data string
that describes the present instrument state on a
tape cartridge or in its’ internal memory. Once an
instrument state is stored or learned, the 8350A can
then be restored to that state using the Input Learn
String function. The power of these instrument
Learn/Teach functions are demonstrated by the
following program using the 983 5A fast data transfer
function.
PROGRAM 4
В ASCIGO1. E
Lg TRU Mee
6 PAUSE LEHREN A
oul 719; pee
outrun Tinie
characters,
Line 30: Set the 8350A to a predefined state via
instrument preset and enable the square
wave modulation.
Line 40:
Line 50:
Line 60:
Return the 8350A to local control.
Temporarily stops program execution.
Program the 8350A to output the Learn
String.
Read the Learn String into the 9835A
using a byte fast handshake transfer of
G0 string characters ignoring the line
feed as the string terminator, Store the
90 character Learn String in AS.
Line 70:
Line 80: Temporarily stops program execution,
Line 90: Program the 8350A to accept a Learn
String, then send the new Learn String to
the 8350A.
Line 100: Stop program execution.
Setup the equipment as in example 3 using the CRT
display to verify the sweep settings. Note that the
original equipment setup can also be used with the
8350A front panel indicators used for verification.
Reset the 9835A, scratch the 9835A memory, then
type in the above program. Run the program. The
8350A will undergo an instrument preset, enable
the square wave modulation, then return to local
front panel control. Then perform the following:
1. Adjust the 8350A to a preferred instrument
state, then press CONTINUE on the 9835A.
EXAMPLE PROGRAM E; Interrogating The Present Value :
While the 8350A Learn String enables the user to
completely save a string of characters that define
the present instrument state, the information is
densely packed and encoded to save memory
space. If the user wishes to determine the actual
value of a specific parameter, say the Start Fre-
quency, itwould require a tedious process to extract
a numeric value from several characters within the
Learn String. An easier approach is to use the Output
Interrogated Parameter function of the 8350A. With
this function the 9835A instructs the 8350A to
output the present numeric value of a specified
function. Any function that has a numeric value
associated with it can be interrogated. Note that if
the parameter is not presently active, the 8350A
uses a computed value or its previous value. The
following program demonstrates the capability of
the interrogate function.
‘Line 50:
PROGRAM 5
PROGRAM 5 EXPLANATION:
Line 10: Set the 8350A to a predefined instru-
ment state via instrument preset and
enable the square wave modulation.
Line 20: Return the 8350A to local control.
Line 30: Temporarily stops program execution.
Line 40: Program the 8350A to output the
present value of the Start Frequency.
2. Turnthe 8350Aline power off. Wait five seconds
then turn the 8350A power back on. Press
INSTR PRESET on the 8350A.
3. Press CONTINUE on the 9835A. Verify on the
CRT display and/or the 8350A that the original
instrument state has been restored.
CH A Function
Read the value into the 9835A and store
it in the variable ‘A’.
Line 60: Print on the CRT display the present
value of the Start Frequency in MHz,
Line 70: Program the 8350A to outputthe present
vaiue of the Stop Frequency.
Line 80: Read the value into the 9835A and store
it in the variable 'B’,
Line 90: Print on the CRT display the present
value of the Stop Frequency in MHz,
Line 100: Program the 8350A to output the present
value of the Sweep Time.
Line 110: Read the value into the 9835A and store
it in the variable “T.
Line 120: Print on the CRT display the present
value of the Sweep Time in milliseconds.
Line 130: Stops program execution,
Setup the equipment as in example 3 using the
analyzers’ CRT display to verify the sweep settings.
Note that the original equipment setup can also be
used with the 8350A front panel indicators used for
verification. Reset the 9835A, scratch the 9835A
memory, then type in the above program. Run the
program. The 8350A will undergo an instrument
preset, enable the square wave modulation, then
return to local front panel control. Then perform the
following:
Adjustthe 8350A to a preferred instrument state
using the Start Frequency, Stop Frequency, and
Sweep Time controls,
CONTINUE on the 9835A.
The present values of the Start Frequency, Stop
Frequency, and Sweep Time are sequentially
interrogated and then printed on the CRT of the
9835A,
2. Press
EXAMPLE PROGHAM E: A Stepped CW Sweep
Present automatic measurement systems typically
make measurements at a sequence of CW test
frequencies instead of analog sweeping the fre-
quency range of interest. If swept, the measurement
data taking machine would need to sample the RF
signal at a very fast rate to maintain accurate
frequency information, too. This is typically not
accomplished. Stepped CW sweeps can be accom-
plished in several ways with the 83504:
1. Program sequential CW test frequencies.
2. Program the frequency sweep range then
enable the manual sweep mode. Perform a
stepped manual sweep by repetitively program-
ming the step up/increment function.
3. Program the CW frequency to the start fre-
quency, the Step Size to an appropriate value,
then repetitively program the step up/incre-
ment function.
Considering the speed of programming the above
approaches, the third is the most efficient. This
program illustrates a stepped sweep using this
approach.
PROGRAM 6
PROGRAM 6 EXPLANATION:
Line 10: Set the 8350A to the predefined instru-
ment state, enable the square wave
modulation, and disable CW Filter.
Line 20: The 9835A displays “Start Freq (CHz) =
?”, input prompts for Start frequency of
the sweep. Store it in the variable ‘A’.
Line 30: The 9835A displays “Stop Freq (CHz) =
7”, input prompts for the stop frequency
of the sweep. Store it in 'B”.
Line 40: The 9835A displays “Step Size (GHz) =
7”, input prompts for the step size of the
sweep. Store it in 'C-.
Line 50: Determine the number of frequency
steps in sweep, store in ‘D’.
Line 60: Set the CW Step Size.
Line 70: Set the CW frequency to the start
frequency value.
Line 80: lterate the CW step 'D’ times.
Line 90: Program the Step Increment/Up function.
Line 100: Wait 20 milliseconds for settling.
Line 110:
Line 120:
Continue step iteration.
Go to line 70.
The equipment setup is the same as in the previous
example. Reset the 9835A, scratch the 9835A
memory, then type in the above program, Run the
program. The 8350A will undergo an instrument
preset and enable the square wave modulation.
Then perform the following:
1. The 9835A will display “Start Freq (GHz) = ?”.
Answer this prompt by inputting the desired
Start frequency {value in GHz) of the sweep,
then press CONTINUE.
2. The 9835A will display “Stop Freg (GHz) =?".
Answer this prompt with the desired Stop
frequency (in GHz) of the sweep, then press
3. The 9835A will display “Step Size (GHz) = 7",
Answer this prompt with the desired Step size
(in GHZ) of the sweep, then press CONTINUE,
4. The 8350A CW frequency will be programmed
to the Start frequency of the sweep selected.
Then the CW frequency is repetitively incre-
mented by the step size value, The sweep ts
then restarted after reaching the stop frequency.
To stop the program press STOP.
Since part of the time involved in changing CW
frequencies is in updating the numeric LED display if
this could be defeated the CW frequency time can
be optimized. Note that one drawback is that the
numeric display will not indicate the present
frequency. The 8350A provides a Display Update
On/Off function and it can be implemented by
modifying line 10 to be:
QUTPUT 719; IPMD? FIODUO”
Then re-run the modified program using the same
operation steps as above,
EXAMPLE PROGRA
e a ÿ à er
hd a
Certain error conditions of the 8350A can be
detected by the 9835A so that corrective action can
be taken. Examples of some detectable error condi-
tions are RF power unleveled, numeric data entry
out of range, and line power failure. If an error
condition exists, the user can instruct the 8350A to
request service from the 9835A by initiating a
Service Request (SRQ). The 9835A can detect
whether an SRQ has taken place on the bus by
analyzing bit 7 (see note below) of the Status Byte of
the 98034A HP-IB Interface. Two modes are avail-
able for analyzing the 98034A Status Byte: (1)
periodically read the Status Byte, or (2) enable bit 7
to interrupt the program when itis set. In either case,
once it is determined that the 8350A has requested
service, the specific error condition(s) can then be
determined by reading and analyzing the Status
Bytes ofthe 8350A. The 8350A has two Status Bytes,
each consisting of 8 bits with each bit indicating the
present status of a particular function or condition.
See Table 1 for a complete description of the
conditions associated with each Status Byte bit. The
user can analyze these Status Bytes forevery SRQ, or
more simply, instruct the 8350A to issue an SRQ
only if a specific set of error conditions exists. The
set of conditions is determined by a numeric value
passed by the Request Mask function. This numeric
value is generated by summing the decimal values
of each Status Byte bit to be checked. This program
demonstrates the capability of the SRQ and Status
Bytes to detect an error condition.
PROGRAM 7
OUTPUT. 718; SIPMDIRA
gra
В a INT #7 Goes
Jaune Service Requests, Slaty
10
NOTE
This assumes that the status bits are numbered 0
thru 7 with the least-significant bit being number
0. Other references may assume that the bits are
numbered T thru 8 with the least-significant bit
being number 1.
if using an 86200 Series Plug-in, the Status Bytes
can provide only limited information. Table 1
indicates which Status Byte functions/bits are
usable,
PROGRAM 7 EXFLANATION:
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
10:
20:
3G:
40;
50:
60:
70:
80:
90:
100:
170:
Clear the status of the HP-iB.
Clear the status of the 8350A.
Preset the 8350A to a predefined instru-
ment state and enable the square wave
modulation, and set the Request Mask
to enable Parameter Altered and Syntax
Error SRQ's.
Indicate that if an interrupt from the
98034A HP-IB Interface is received that
program execution will branch to the
interrupt service routine located at the
line labelled ‘Sra’.
Specify an interrupt from the 98034A if
bit 7 (decimal value 128) is set.
Enable the controller to accept an inter-
rupt from the 98034A.
The 9835A displays “CW Freq (GHz) =
?", input prompts for the desired CW
frequency value in GHz. Store it in the
variable Р'.
Setthe CW frequencyas determined by
'Р.
Wait 100 milliseconds to allow the
8350A to interrupt.
Go to line 70,
Location of the interrupt service routine,
Read the Status Byte of the 8350A and
store it in ‘A’,
Line 120;
Line 130:
Line 140:
Line 150:
Line 160:
Line 170:
Check bit 0 of the 8350A Status Byte for
an Altered Parameter error. Print on the
CRT display “Parameter Altered” if one
exists.
Check bit 5 of the 8350A Status Byte for
a Syntax error. Print on the CRT display
“Syntax Error” if one exists.
Clear the 8350A Status Byte to enable
another SRQ.
Re-specify bit 7 of the 98034A to cause
an interrupt.
Re-enable interrupts from the 98034A,
Return from the interrupt
routine to the main program.
service
The equipment setup is the same as the previous
example, Reset the 9835A, scratch the 9835A
memory, then type in the above program. Run the
program. The 8350A will undergo an instrument
preset and enable the square wave modulation. The
3835A then displays “CW Freq (GHz) =". Answer
this prompt by inputting the desired CW frequency
in GHz, then press CONTINUE. Verify that the
8350A CW frequency has been properly pro-
grammed. Try several values that are out of range of
the plug-in's frequency limits and verify that an error
message was printed on the CRT display. The
program repeats the above input prompt. To stop
the program press STOP.
Table 1. 8350A Status Byte Descriptions
STATUS BYTE (41)
ВЕ
n | | Numere
UCI) “Parameter
| Altered to
| Default
{4 Vale
“| NJA | SelfTes
*Rit/ Functions not usable with 86200 Series Plug-ins and 11869A Adapter,
HEIR PROGRAMMING CODES
Code Description Code Description
AKm Amplitude Marker On/Off MPm Marker 1-2 Sweep On/Off
ALmn Alternate Sweep On/Off MS Milliseconds
Al Internal Leveling MZ MHz
A2 External Crystal Leveling MO Marker Off
A3 External Power Meter Leveling M1 Marker #1
В M2 Marker #2
BK Backspace M3 Marker #3
CAm Amplitude Crystal Marker On/Off M4 Marker #4
(83522/83525 Only) M5 Marker #5
CF Center Frequency |
Cim Intensity Crystal Marker On/Off NT Network Analyzer Trigger (84108)
(83522/83525 Only) OA Output Active Parameter
Cw CW Frequency OL Qutput Learn String
C1 1 MHz Crystal Marker Frequency OM Output Mode String
(83522/83525 Only) OP Output Interrogated Parameter
C2 10 MHz Crystal Marker Frequency OS Output Status bytes
(83522/83525 Only) OX Output Micro Learn String
C3 50 MHz Crystal Marker Frequency PL Power Level
(83522/83525 Only) PSm Power Sweep On/Off
C4 External Crystal Marker Frequency RCh Recall Register
(83522/83525 Only) RFm RF Power On/Off
DF Delta F Frequency Span RM Service Request Mask
DM dBm RPm RF Blanking On/Off
DN Step Down/Decrement RS Reset Sweep
DPm Display Blanking On/Off .
DUm Display Update On/Off >. Seconds
SF. Frequency Step Size
E Exponent Power Of 10 SH Shift Function
FA Start Frequency Sim Slope On/Off
FB Stop Frequency SM Manual Sweep
Fim CW Filter In/Out SP Power Step Size
F1 —20 MHz/V FM 55 Step Size
F2 —6 MHz/V FM ST Sweep Time
C7 GHz SVn Save Register
; SX external Sweep
HZ Hz
TS Take Sweep
IL input Learn String T1 Internal Sweep Trigger
IP Instrument Preset T2 Line Sweep Trigger
IX Input Micro Learn String T3 External Sweep Trigger
KZ KHz T4 Single Sweep
MC Marker To Center Frequency UP Step Up/Increment
MDm Square Wave Amplitude Modula- VR CW Vernier
tion On/Off
MO Marker Off 0-9 +— Acceptable Numeric Data
NOTES
ft. Program codes of the form “XXm” use “m” to turn the function On or Off (1 or 0). For the storage register
functions the “n” is 1 through 9, |
2. The 8350A ignores spaces, plus signs, negative signs {except when valid) and any unexpected characters.
Program codes can be upper or lower case alpha characters.
For more information, call your local HP Sales Office or nearest Regional Office: Eastern (201) 265-5000; Midwestern (312) 255-9800; Southern (404) 955.1500; Western (213)
970-7500; Canadian (416) 678-9430, Ask the operator for instrument sales. Or write Hewlett-Packard, 1501 Page Mill Road, Palo Alto, CA 94304. in Europe: Hewiett-Packard
S.A., 7, rue du Bois-du-Lan, P.O. Box, CH 1217 Meyrin 2, Geneva, Switzerland, In Japan: Yokogawa-Hewiett-Packard Ltd., 29-21, Takaido-igashi 3-chome, Suginami-ku, Tokyo 168,
5952-9306 Printed in U.S.À.
8350A/9845B-1
Supersedes: None
OCTOBER 1980
for th
INTRODUCTION
This programming note is a guide to the remote
operation of the HP 8350A Sweep Oscillator and
appropriate HP 83500 Series Plug-in using the HP
9845B Desktop Computer. Included in this guide
are the system connections for remote operation
and several example programs with descriptions of
each step,
The 8350A is fully compatible with the Hewlett
Packard Interface Bus (HP-IB). When used with a
controller such as the 9845B, complete control of
the sweep mode, frequency limits, frequency
markers, power level, and all other front panel
controls can be achieved.
REFERENCE INFORMATION
For further information on the HP Interface Bus, the
following reference should prove helpful:
e Condensed Description of the Hewlett-Packard
Interface Bus (HP Literature No. 59401-90030).
Complete reference information on the 8350A can
be found in the §350A Sweep Oscillator Operating
and Service Manual (HP Part No. 08350-90001). For
information on operating the 98458 the following
references are available:
® 98458 Operating and Programming Manual (HP
Part No. 09845-91000).
® 98458 1/0 ROM Programming Manual (HP Part
No. 09845-91060).
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
To perform ail the example programs described in
this programming note, you will need the following
equipment and accessories:
1. HP 8350A Sweep Oscillator with any HP 83500
Series Plug-in. Note that an HP 86200 Series
Plug-in with the HP 11869A Adapter can be used
but all references to power level and power
control are not applicable.
OHEWLETT-PACKARD CO, 1980
2.
HP 98458 Desktop Computer with:
a. HP 98412A 1/0 ROM (actually 2 ROMs)
b. HP 98034A Revised HP-1B Interface Card/
Cable
NOTE
The following equipment is not required for the
programs to function but rather for a visual
display of the 8350A functions.
HP 8755S Frequency Response Test Set with:
a. HP 8755C Swept Amplitude Analyzer
D. HP 180TR or 182T Display Unit
c. HP 11664A or 11664B Detector
d. Two 120 cm. (4 ft.) BNC cables (HP 11170C
variety)
or any appropriate Oscilloscope with Crystal/
Schottky Detector, Attenuator, and BNC Cabling.
Any test device over the frequency range of the
83500 Series Plug-in.
SET-UP
Figure 1 shows the system connection and switch
settings for the 98034A Interface and the 9845B
Desktop Computer. The following procedure com-
pletes the setup:
1. Turn off the power to the 9845B.
2. Verify thatthe ROMs are installed inthe 9845 8B.
If not, then install the ROM's in the appropriate
side panel drawers of the 98458.
3. Instalithe98034A Interface Card into one ofthe
rear panel slots of the 98458.
4. Verify that the rotary switch on top of the
98034A is setto 7”. fnotthensetitto 7” since
thisisthe select code forthe interface card forall
programs found within this guide.
5. Connect the 24-pin HP-IB connector of the
98034A to the rear panel HP-IB connector of the
8350A. This connector is tapered to insure
proper connection.
HP INTERFACE BUS
Не
pou Inyo,
8350A/83500 PLUG-IN
Ju
38034A
ROM Drawer |
9845B
ROM Drawer
IDO
a ds
Cea a EA
PICA ES
E
Соса 2
Pres gs
MODDEN DEI O 00000
CoO0DO0S0OCS000 à H9000
SODOCANOONDDES (} 0660
СООО = Вар
mmm 3 [: SASDA
—
Figure 1.
2
System Connection
CAUTION
Do not attempt to mate black metric threaded
screws on one connector with silver English
threaded nuts on another connector, or vice-
versa, as damage may result. A metric conversion
kit which will convert one cable and one or two
instruments to metric hardware is available by
ordering HP Part No. 5060-0138.
6. All programs within this guide expect the §350A
HP-1B address to be decimal 19. The 8350A HP-
|B address switches are located inside the instru-
ment and are factory preset to decimal 19. To
execute a front panel ‘Set HP-IB address’ which
will display the present HP-IB address:
Press SHIFT LCL
The FREQUENCY/TIME display willindicate the
present decimal address. To reset the number if
19 is not displayed:
Press 1 :9 GHz
This HP-IB address will remain in effect until the
instrument is powered off since the internal
address switches are read at power on (unless
8350A Option 001 Non-volatile Memory is
used). Since Example 4 requires the 8350A to be
powered off then on, the internal address
switches should be reset to 19 if necessary.
CHECK-OUT
Turn on the 9845B and the 8350A. The 98458
should undergo an internal memory test then
display “98458 READY FOR USE” on the CRT
display. The 8350A should also undergo a turn-on
self test consisting of the red LED numeric displays
being blanked and all yellow indicator LED's on,
then the 8350A sweep controls are set to the
instrument preset state: Start/Stop Sweep over the
entire plug-in frequency range, fastest sweep time
for plug-in {typically 10 milliseconds), and maxi-
mum leveled output power for the plug-in. If the
8350A fails the power-up self test an error message
will be displayed in the far left LED display. Check
section 8 of the 8350A Operating and Service
Manual for error message decoding and diagnostics.
To verify that the HP-1B connections and interface
are functional perform the following on the 9845B:
1. Press CONTROL: STOP (or RESET)
2. Type REMOTE 719’
3. Press EXECUTE.
Verify that the REM light on the 8350A is lit. 1 this
fails, verify that the 98034A select code switch is set
to “7”, the 8350A address switches are set to 19”,
and the interface cable is properly connected.
If the 98458 display indicates an error message, it is
possible that the above remote message was typed
in incorrectly or the ROM's are not properly in-
stalled, If the 9845B accepts the remote statement
and the display is clear but the 8350A REM light
does not turn on, you could have a defective
98034A or 8350A. Perform the operational checks
as outlined in the respective Operating and Service
Manuals to find the defective device.
PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES
The following sample programs show the various
ways of controlling the 8350A. In remote control
situations the 8350A Sweep Oscillator can interact
with the system HP-IB controller in two basic ways:
1, “Listen Mode”: Here the 8350A listens to the
control commands as to modifying the present
instrument state. This effectively commands the
8350A to do a specific event much like setting a
front panel function.
2. “Talk Mode”: Here the 8350A informs the
controller of the present instrument state with a
numeric value or a string of characters. This
effectively allows the userto interrogate or learn
any 8350A function.
tach programming example is structured using the
following format:
A general description of the functions exercised
The program listing
An explanation of each program line
Detailed instructions for operating the program.
daw haa
EXAMPLE PROGRAM 1: Remote, Local, Local Lockout, and Instrument Preset
Before programming the 8350A for different sweep
functions, the user should be aware of the extent of
remote control that can be used. The Remote
Enable (REMOTE) command sets the 8350A into
remote control from the local (manual) mode, In
remote the 8350A will perform only as its functions
are programmed. However if the LCL button is
pressed, the 8350A will return from the remote state
to local control. To prevent this from occurting the
Local Lockout {LOCAL LOCKOUT) command dis-
ables all front panel controls, specifically the “Local”
key. The Go To Local ( LOCAL’) command will return
the 8350A to front panel control thereby removing it
fromthe remote and local lockout modes. Note that
the above remote and local commands are different
from the general HP-1B bus local and remote com-
mands (LOCAL 7° and "REMOTE 7). Finally, in
remote control it is periodically desirable to reset
the 8350A to a predefined state, this is achievable
with the Instrument Preset function.
PROGRAM 1
BE 5 1 se “Remote” - Sine ETE
AR REMOTE” 718.
LSE ROAR LUCKOUT | НОННА
След TE En i GE: A "Lor at Lock si чё’ Mois: : дн =
Fa “Local E
UN Е ЗЛА En: Pau: SE. CE 7 or : EA ; a E с : ; - г elo
ве) enr” ï i NN
PROGRAM 1 EXPLANATION:
Line 10: Sets 8350A to remote.
Line 20: The 98458 displays “Remote”.
Line 30: Temporarily stops program execution.
Line 40: Sets 8350A to remote.
Line 50: Sets local lockout mode.
Line 60: The 98458 displays "Local Lockout”,
Line 70: Temporarily stops program execution.
Line 80: Sets 8350A to local.
Line 90: The 9845B displays “Local”,
Line 100: Temporarily stops program execution.
Line 110: Sets 8350A to remote and performs an
Instrument Preset.
EXAMPLE PROGRAM 2: Programming Functions
Line 120: Stops program execution.
To verify and investigate the different remote
modes do the following:
1. Press CONTROL STOP SCRATCH A
EXECUTE on the 9845B. This scratches the
program memory.
Press INSTR-PRESET on the 8350A,
Type in the above program.
Press RUN on the 9845B.
With the 9845B displaying “Remote”, verify that
the 8350A REM light is lit. From the front panel,
attempt to change the start frequency and verify
that this isimpossible. Verify thatthe Instrument
Preset key and all other keys except LCL are
disabled. Now press the LCL key and verify that
the 8350A REM light is off and that you can
modify any of the sweep functions.
Vi > WE
6. Press CONT on the 9845B. With the 9845B
displaying “Local Lockout” verify that the 8350A
REM light is again lit. Again attempt to change
the start frequency and perform an instrument
preset. Verify that this is impossible. Now press
the LCL key and verify that still no action is
taken.
7. Press CONT on the 9845B. With the 98458
displaying “Local” verify that the 8350A REM
light is off. Also verify that all sweep functions
can now be modified via the front panel controls,
8. Press CONT on the 9845B. Verify that the
8350A has undergone an Instrument Preset and
the REM light is on, The Output (OUTPUT719)
statement does two things, one it performs a
REMOTE 719’, and second it passes data to the
8350A.
Note that the 8350A LCL key produces the same
resultas programming LOCAL 719 or'LOCAL7'. Be
careful as the latter command places all instruments
on the HP-IB in local state as opposed to the 8350A
alone.
To program any function on the 8 350A the controller
must pass specific program codes and data to the
sweeper. The statement that allows this is the
Output OUTPUT’) statement. The alphanumeric
data string of the output statement can be a
concatenation of character strings and/or variables.
The data can be specific codes, free field formatted
data, or reference a specific image (IMAGE) state-
ment. For example, to program the CW Frequency
(CW), one program code sequence is “CW”,
followed by the frequency in GHz, then “GZ”, If the
frequency is to be 7.555 GHz, then the string
“CW7,555GZ” will suffice. However if the frequency
were to change then a variable 'F could indicate the
frequency in GHz and the program string could be
"CW FGZ”. Using an image statement also allows
a specific number of digits to be passed, thereby
avoiding any unexpected round off errors.
NOTE
This program expects an 83500 Series Plug-in that
covers the frequency 7.555 GHz. fusing a plug-in
that does not cover this frequency range then the
value in lines 30 and 40 should be changed to an
appropriate value.
PROGRAM. 2
AE cum Te u т 7 713 3; у: “i Pp: eo ce МЛ: X SI a
58 A : PAU SE: сл he Sa : = NA
CERO INPUT: in € 1 in Hz) Sim ew oF ARM
WET £ E - PR 1 HT В “Cu e RES К HZ a a В 3 = Val Л
A 5 E UT 7 t 3; 3 Ai HE Cu its SF “ez Ue т: nt Ч
Ze 8 2 x E 6 T To o
PROGRAM 2 EXPLANATION:
Line 10: Puts the 8350A into a predefined state
via instrument preset,
Line 20: Fixes numeric data output to 2 decimal
places.
Line 30: Puts the 8350A in CW mode and pro-
grams a CW frequency of 7.555 GHz,
Line 40: The 9845B displays “CW =7.555 GHz".
Line 50: Temporarily stops program execution.
Line 60: The 98458 displays “CW (in GHz) =?"
The useris prompted to inputa new CW
frequency value which is stored in the
variable 'F,
Line 70: Printonthe CRT display the programmed
CW frequency,
Line 80: Program the CW frequency using the
default data format.
Line 90: Coto line 60.
Line 100: Image statement is set up for program-
ming the CW frequency with a 1 MHz
resolution,
Line 110: Program the CW frequency. via image
statement in line TOO.
Line 120: Go to line 66.
The equipment setup is the same as the previous
example. Reset the 98458, scratch the 9845B
memory, then type in the above program. Then do
the following:
1. Run the program. The 9845B displays “CW =
7.555 GHz”, The 8350A changes from the instru-
ment preset state of Start/Stop sweep to a CW
freqliency of 7.555 GHz.
2. Press CONT on the 9845B. The 9845B now
displays “CW (in GHz) =?", Type in a new CW
frequency (value in GHz), then press CONT,
3. The 8350A will be programmed to the new CW
frequency with the new value printed on the
CRT display. The program jumps back to step (2)
above.
When inputting the CW frequency try several
values, each with a different number of digits after
the decimal point. Notice that the 8350A displays
the frequency to 3 decimal places (1 MHz fre-
quency resolution). Values with better than 1 MHz
frequency resolution are rounded to the nearest
MHz by the 8350A, However when the 9845B is
reset all numeric output data defaults to the “FIXED
2 or fixed 2 decimal places format. Thus the 9845B
rounds the desired frequency to the nearest 10
MHz. To change this free-field format to more
decimal places modify the fixed format statement in
line 20 to "FIXED 5’ from the keyboard then re-run
the program. Another approach is to utilize the
image statement to set the desired number of
decimal places. To use the image statement in the
program, do the following on the 98458:
Press STOP
Type 'DEL 80, 990
Press EXECUTE
This should delete lines 80 and 90 from program #2
and allow the use of lines 100, 110, and 120 instead.
Run the modified program again and use the same
steps for operation as before. Now if the value
inputted has a frequency resolution greater than
1 MHz the 98458 does the rounding instead of the
8350A. This is the preferred programming approach.
Change the image statement for 10 MHz frequency
resolution and verify the results from the 8350A
frequency display.
Since a device select code address can be a variable,
verify that this can be used in the modified or
original program #2 by doing the following:
1. Insert before Line 10 a new line with the variable
‘Swp’ by:
Press STOP
Type '5 Swp==719"
Press STORE
2. Modify the output statement(s) by editing the
necessary lines and changing the
‘OUTPUT 719" to ‘OUTPUT Swp’ and
‘OUTPUT 719 USING 100’ to ‘OUTPUT Swp
USING 100°,
Re-run the modified program using the same
operation steps as above.
EXAMPLE PROGRAM 3: Setting Up A Typical Sweep
Typically the sweeper is programmed for the proper
sweep frequency range, sweep time, power level,
and. marker frequencies for a test measurement.
This program sets up the sweeper for a general
purpose situation using several dedicated image
statements. Note that not all parameters need tobe -
reprogrammed every time.
NOTE
This program expects an 83500 Series Plug-in that
covers the frequency range of atleast 3 to 7 GHz.
If using a plug-in with a different frequency range,
change the values in lines 60, 90, and 100, to the
appropriate values. If using an 86200 Series Plug-
in then do not enter line 70.
PROGRAM : 3
re pene “ER” "DD: DED, “EZFE”, BD, ‚вов, ez
86 IMAGE wp D, ‘ph. DDD, ere
ULSA TIMBRES SEL. DDD: D; cm
se AUTRUT PIS TEND e
USSR CODUTPUT P13- USING 19:3,7
PB OUTPUT 719 USING 40:15
CNB BIT PUT PARC US THG RAL SE
0. 96 OUTFOT 713. USING 3831,4 NDA
ABE OUTPUT. 719. see
101185 "END. AENA EA AT
PROGRAM 3 EXPLANATION:
Line 10: Image statement for setting the Start
and Stop Sweep frequencies in GHz
Line 20: Image statement for setting the Sweep
Time in milliseconds.
Line 30: Image statement for setting a Frequency
Marker by marker number and fre-
quency in GHz.
Line 40: image statement for setting the Output
Power Level in dBm.
Line 50: Preset the sweeper to a known state vía
instrument preset and enable the in-
ternal 27.8 kHz Square Wave Ampli-
tude Modulation.
Line 60: SetaStart/Stop Sweep of 3.0to 7.0 GHz.
Line 70: Setthe Output Power Leveito+10 dBm.
Line 80: Setthe Sweep Time to 50 milliseconds.
Line 90: Set Marker#1 to 4 GHz.
Line 100: Set Marker#2 to 6 GHz.
Line 110: Stops program execution.
Set up the equipment as shown in Figure2 by
adding the 8755C, the 180TR or 182T, the 11664,
and a test device like a 4 to 6 GHz Bandpass Filter. It
Is important that the two rear panel connections
from the 8350A to the 8755C/182T are made for a
proper CRT display. For the example measurement
set the following front panel controls:
On the 8755:
Channel 1:
Display ......... OFF (press all the display
push buttons so that they are ail out)
Channel 2:
Display ..........e._eereveoreocaar ena, B
dB/DIV.. eee eeeeeecceaeraa. 10 dB
Reference Level .................. —10 dB
Reference Level Vernier.............. OFF
On the 182T or 180TR: |
Magnifier ....... e... eee reco. XT
Display... i e... INT
HP 98458
HP 8I50A
SWEEP OSCILLATOR
87556/1827 SWEPT
AMPLITUDE ANALYZER
DESKTOP COMPUTER
pr oa a na mea que = РОБ £ ELANK AUX e
— бе а, SE ae se) | TE SWEEP OUTAN
= e ado er 5 5 {Front ar Rear) AUX DT
N
в
x.
BEER E 3888
EERE « = + НЯНЯ
8-0 с Фе
DEVICE
UNDER TEST 11864
DETECTOR
nc TE и bt mbit
Figure 2. Equipment Setup For Program 3
After connecting the equipment: reset the 98458,
scratch the 9845B memory, then type in the above
program. Then run the program. The 8350A will
initially undergo an instrument preset which will set
the proper power leveling mode and sweep
blanking signals. Since the 8755C requires the RF
signal to be modulated at a 27.8 kHz rate, the
internal amplitude modulation is enabled. If using a
4 to 6 GHz Bandpass Filter as the test device, the
CRT display should reflect the filter transmission
response over the 3 to 7 GHz range. Two frequency
markers of the Z-Axis Intensity dot variety are set to
4 and 6 GHz, hopefully within the passband or near
the 3 dB points. The setup can be modified by
changing the values in lines 60, 70, 80, 90, and/or
100, then re-run the program. |
EXAMPLE PROGRAM 4: Learning An Instrument State
Being able to save a specific instrument state is
helpful when it is needed several times in a test or
measurement procedure. The user could save the
instrument state by manually logging the important
sweep parameters such as frequency range, power
level, ALC modes, etc., then re-inputting them at the | “sa PAUSE НО © ss 5
appropriate time. A somewhat simpler approach is о £0 — BUTPUT ee .. sonia ©
to save the instrument state in one of the 8350A meme oh RENA AAA
internal storage registers, then recall itwhen needed. CER OUTPUT, 7193 “ELMER ST LTE
However, this is nota permanent solution uniessthe
8350A Non-volatile Memory option (Option 001) is
used. A more permanent solution is to use the
Output Learn String function of the 8350A so that
the 9845B can learn then store a data string that
describes the present instrument state on a tape
cartridge or in its’ internal memory. Once an instru-
ment state is stored or learned, the 8350A can then
be restored to that state using the Input Learn String
function. The power of these instrument Learn/ Teach
functions are demonstrated by the following program
using the 9845B fast data transfer function.
PROGRAM 4 4
16 eTION Y BATE а
88. OUTPUT. 718; meme |
1806. END
PROGRAM 4 EXPLANATION:
Line 10: Define the first element in any array to
be at index number 1.
Line 20: Set the length of the AS string to 100
characters.
Line 30: Setthe 8350A to a predefined state via
instrument preset and enable the square
wave modulation.
Line 40: Return the 8350A to local control.
Line 50: Temporarily stops program execution.
Line 60: Program the 83504 to output the Learn
String.
Line 70: Read the Learn String into the 98458
using a byte fast handshake transfer of
90 string characters ignoring the line
feed as the string terminator. Store the
90 character Learn String in AS.
Line 80: Temporarily stops program execution.
Line 90: Program the 8350A to accept a Leam
String, then send the new Learn String to
the 8350A,
Line 100: Stops program execution.
Setup the equipment as in example 3 using the CRT
display to verify the sweep settings. Note that the
original equipment setup can also be used with the
8350A front panel indicators used for verification.
Reset the 9845B, scratch the 9845B memory, then
type in the above program. Run the program. The
8350A will undergo an instrument preset, enable
the square wave modulation, then return to local
front panel control. Then perform the following:
1, Adjust the 8350A to a preferred instrument
state, then press CONT on the 98458,
2. Tumthe 8350Aline power off. Wait five seconds
then turn the 8350A power back on. Press
INSTR PRESET on the 8350A.
3. Press CONT on the 9845B. Verify on the CRT
display and/or the 8350A that the original
instrument state has been restored.
EAAMPLE PROGRAM 5: Interrogating The Present Value Of À Function
While the 8350A Learn String enables the user to
completely save a string of characters that define
the present instrument state, the information is
densely packed and encoded to save memory
space, If the user wishes to determine the actual
value of a specific parameter, say the Start Fre-
guency, it would require a tedious process to extract
a numeric value from several characters within the
Learn String, An easier approachis to use the Output
Interrogated Parameter function of the 8350A. With
this function the 9845B instructs the 8350A to
output the present numeric value of a specified
function. Any function that has a numeric value
associated with it can be interrogated. Note that if
the parameter is not presently active, the 8350A
uses a computed value or its previous value. The
following program demonstrates the capability of
the interrogate function.
PROGRAM >
Cie Perec 715. CI Cin
CBA PAUSE a
e mp ENTE в. > 4 455 i a E DIS SU SEE CET
(ii Ba F В 1 М т. в "E ar e ‘Fra = à В = TIRLIERST MHIT
BB ENTER. 715: в: es ETS
(au PRINT "Stop Fees, CE NIBCAEEGOMHZT
488 QUTRUT TERCOPETY 00 NA IU
18 ENTER 71977 oe DIT ie
ADE ORRIN Sweep. Time = 5 1000KT; 0 sect
Á3B: END М |
PROGRAM 5 EXPLANATION:
Line 10: Set the 8350A to a predefined instru-
ment state via instrument preset and
enable the square wave modulation.
Line 20: Return the 8350A to local control.
Line 30: Temporarily stops program execution.
Line 40: Program the 8350A to output the
present value of the Start Frequency.
Line 50: Read the value into the 9845B and store
it in the variable ‘A’.
Line 60: Print on the CRT display the present
value of the Start Frequency in MHz,
Line 70: Program the 8350A to output the present
value of the Stop Frequency.
Line 80: Readthe value into the 98458 and store
it in the variable В’.
Line 90: Print on the CRT display the present
value of the Stop Frequency in MHz.
Line 100: Program the 8350A to output the present
value of the Sweep Time,
Line 110: Read the value into the 9845B and store
it'in the variable ‘T*.
Line 120: Print on the CRT display the present
value of the Sweep Time in milliseconds.
Line 130: Stops program execution.
Setup the equipment as in example 3 using the
analyzers’ CRT display to verify the sweep settings.
Note that the original equipment setup can also be
used with the 8350A front panel indicators used for
verification. Reset the 9845B, scratch the 98458
memory, then type in the above program. Run the
program. The 8350A will undergo an instrument
preset, enable the square wave modulation, then
return to local front panel control. Then perform the
following:
EXAMPLE PROGRAM 6: А Stepped CW Sweep
1. Adjustthe 8350A toa preferred instrument state
using the Start Frequency, Stop Frequency, and
Sweep Time controls.
2. Press CONT on the 98458,
3. The present values of the Start Frequency, Stop
Frequency, and Sweep Time are sequentially
interrogated and then printed on the CRT of the
98458.
Present automatic measurement systems typically
make measurements at a sequence of CW test
frequencies instead of analog sweeping the fre-
quency range of interest. If swept, the measurement
data taking machine would need to sample the RF
signal at a very fast rate to maintain accurate
frequency information, too. This is typically not
accomplished. Stepped CW sweeps can be accom-
plished in several ways with the 83504:
1. Program sequential CW test frequencies,
2. Program the frequency sweep range then
enable the manual sweep mode. Perform a
stepped manual sweep by repetitively program-
ming the step up/increment function.
3. Program the CW frequency to the start fre-
quency, the Step Size to an appropriate value,
then repetitively program the step up/incre-
ment function,
Considering the speed of programming the above
approaches, the third is the most efficient time wise.
This program illustrates a stepped sweep using this
approach.
PROGRAM 6
PROGRAM 6 EXPLANATION:
Line 10: Set the 8350A to a predefined instru-
ment state, enable the square wave
modulation, and disable CW Filter.
Line 20: The 98458 displays “Start Freq (GHz) =
7’, input prompts for Start frequency of
the sweep. Store it in the variable ‘A’,
Line 30: The 98458 displays “Stop Freq (GHz) =
?”, input prompts forthe stop frequency
of the sweep. Store it 'В'.
Line 40: The 9845B displays “Step Size (GHz) =
?, input prompis for the step size of the
sweep. Store It in 'C-
Line 50: Determine the number of frequency
steps in sweep, store in ‘DD.
Line 60: Set the CW Step Size.
Line 70: Set the CW frequency to the start
frequency value.
Line 80: Iterate the CW step D’ times.
Line 90: Program the Step Increment/Up func-
tion.
Line 100: Wait 20 milliseconds for settling.
Line 110: Continue step iteration.
Line 120: Go to line 70.
The equipment setup is the same as in the previous
example. Reset the 9845B, scratch the 9845B
memory, then type in the above program. Run the
program. The 8350A will undergo an instrument
preset and enable the square wave modulation.
Then perform the following:
1. The 98458 will display “Start Freg (GHZ) =?",
Answer this prompt by inputting the desired
Start frequency (value in GHz) of the sweep,
then press CONT.
2. The 9845B will display “Stop Freq (GHz) = 7",
Answer this prompt with the desired Stop
frequency (in GHz) of the sweep, then press
3. The 9845B will display “Step Size (GHz) = 7",
Answer this prompt with the desired Step size
(in GHz) of the sweep, then press CONT.
4. The 8350A CW frequency will be programmed
to the Start frequency of the sweep selected.
Then the CW frequency is repetitively incre-
mented by the step size value. The sweep is
then restarted after reaching the stop frequency.
To stop the program press STOP.
Since part of the time involved in changing CW
EXAMPLE PROGRAM 7: Usin
frequencies isinupdating the numeric LED displayif
this could be defeated the CW frequency time can
be optimized. Note that one drawback is that the
numeric display will not indicate the present fre-
quency. The 8350A provides a Display Update
On/Off function and it can be implemented by
modifying line 10 to be:
OUTPUT 719; 1PMD1FIODUO”
Then re-run the modified program using the same
operation steps as above.
ervice Requests, Status Bytes, and Request Mask
Certain error conditions of the 8350A can be
detected by the 9845B so that corrective action can
be taken, Examples of some detectable error condi-
tions are RF power unieveled, numeric data entry
out of range, and line power failure. If an error
condition exists, the user can instruct the 8350A to
request service from the 9845B by initiating a
Service Request (SRQ). The 9845B can detect
whether an SRQ has taken place on the bus by
analyzing bit 7 (see note below) of the Status Byte of
the 98034A HP-IB Interface. Two modes are avail-
able for analyzing the 98034A Status Byte: (1)
periodically read the Status Byte, or (2) enable bit 7
to interrupt the program when itis set. Ineither case,
once itis determined that the 8350A has requested
service, the specific error condition(s) can then be
determined by reading and analyzing the Status
Bytes of the 8350A. The 8350A has two Status Bytes,
each consisting of 8 bits with each bit indicating the
present status of a particular function or condition.
See Table 1 for a complete description of the
conditions associated with each Status Byte bit. The
user can analyze these Status Bytes for every SRQ, or
more simply, instruct the 8350A to issue an SRQ
only if a specific set of error conditions exists. The
set of conditions is determined by a numeric value
passed by the Request Mask function. This numeric
value is generated by summing the decimal values
of each Status Byte bit to be checked. This program
demonstrates the capability of the SRQ and Status
Bytes to detect an error condition.
NOTE
This assumes that the status bits are numbered 0
thru 7 with the least-significant bit being number
8. Other references may assume that the bits are
numbered 1 thru 8 with the least-significant bit
being number 1.
10
If using an 86200 Series Plug-in, the Status Bytes
can provide only limited information. Table 1
indicates which Status Byte functions/bits are
usable.
PROGRAM 7
4 - ABORTIO т E. Ls с ВОт
#6 CLEAR. PS o o
28 DUTPUT F153 "IPRADIRMECHESLE7).
- 48 ON CINTO 47 GÓSUE Seg, 0000 CT
De. CONTROL MASK 3, FREE DA.
EB CARD ENABLE. NAT
ве OUTPUT 7153 "EN Ч "EZ. a ia MATE
88; MAIT 188 = EA o
188 GOTO. FE ie
148 Sra: STATUS 7187R IU
128. TE EITIA, 62451 THEN GOTH 168
138 CIF BIT(R,65=1 THEN PRINT
. 5 В ; : К Far Ame t. ar À 1 + er ed” APR ELO
CART ETTORE UTHER PRINT EA E
1567 CLEAR E a BA ET
ARO CONTROL MASK. 7108 Do
CATE CARD ENABLE. edo bal PA
18 se: RETURN. e 5 A : Е Prairie ea a ALI
PROGRAM 7 EXPLANATION:
Line 10: Clear the status of the HP-1B.
Line 20: Clear the status of the 8350A.
Line 30: Presetthe 8350A to a predefined instru-
ment state enable the square wave
modulation, and set the Request Mask
to enable Parameter Altered and Syntax
Error SRO's.
Line 40: Indicate that if an interrupt from the
98034A HP-IB Interface is received that
program execution will branch to the
interrupt service routine located at the
line labelled ‘Srq’.
Line 50: Specify an interrupt from the 98034A if
bit 7 {decimal value 128) is set,
Table 1. 8350A Status Byte Descriptions
STATUS BYTE (41)
BA
NA
coo | SERVICE 4
SRQon |
Syntax 4
—|5КО оп
-| Numeric -
3 Parameter
Altered to
Default
Value
[skqon | МА
(00000) Status Bytep
EXTENDED STATUS BYTE (#2)
BIT #
Бо
МАШЕ | 196
Airflow
| Self Test
FUNCTION.
i Failure
Failure/on о = ota af
Failed
*Bit/ Functions not usable with 86200 Series Plug-ins and 11869A Adapter.
Line 60:
Line 70:
Line 80:
Line 90:
Line 100:
Line 110:
Line 120:
Line 130:
Enable the controller to accept an inter-
rupt from the 98034A.
The 98458 displays “CW Freq (GHz) =
?”, input prompts for the desired CW
frequency value in GHz, Store it in the
variable ‘F,
Set the CW frequency-as determined by
+,
Wait 100 milliseconds to allow the
8350A to interrupt.
Go to line 70.
Location of the interrupt service routine.
Read the Status Byte of the 8350A and
store it in À,
Check bit 6 of the 8350A Status Byte to
see if it generated the SRQ, go to line
160 if not.
Check bit 0 of the 8350A Status Byte for
an Altered Parameter error. Print on the
CRT display “Parameter Altered” if one
exists.
11
Line 140:
Line 150:
Line 160:
Line 170:
Line 180:
Check bit 5 of the 8350A Status Byte for
a Syntax error. Print on the CRT display
“Syntax Error” if one exists.
Clear the 8350A Status Byte to enable
another SRQ.
Re-specify bit 7 of the 98034A to cause
an interrupt,
Re-enanle interrupts from the 98034A,
Return from the interrupt service routine
to the main program.
The equipment setup is the same as the previous
example. Reset the 9845B, scratch the 9845B
memory, then type in the above program. Run the
program. The 8350A will undergo an instrument
preset and enable the square wave modulation. The
9845B then displays “CW Freq (GHz) =?”. Answer
this prompt by inputting the desired CW frequency
in GHz, then press CONT. Verify that the 8350A
CW frequency has been properly programmed. Try
several values that are out of range of the plug-ins
frequency limits and verify that an error message
was printed on the CRT display. The program
repeats the above input prompt. To stop the
program press STOP.
HPIR PROGRAM CODES
Code Description Code Description
АКт Amplitude Marker On/Off MPm Marker 1-2 Sweep On/Off
ALmn Alternate Sweep On/Off MS Milliseconds
A1 Internal Leveling MZ MHz
A? External Crystal Leveling MO Marker Of
A3 External Power Meter Leveling M3 Marker #1
M2 Marker #2
K Backspace
5 acKspace M3 Marker #3
CAm Amplitude Crystal Marker On/Off M4 Marker #4
CF Center Frequency | Lo
Clm Intensity Crystal Marker On/Off NT Network Analyzer Trigger (84108)
(83522/83525 Only) OA Output Active Parameter
CW CW Frequency OL Output Learn String
C1 1 MHz Crystal Marker Frequency OM Output Mode String
(83522/83525 Only) OP Output interrogated Parameter
C2 10 MHz Crystal Marker Frequency OS Output Status Bytes
(83522/83525 Only) OX Output Micro Learn String
C3 50 MHz Crystal Marker Frequency PL Power Level
(83522/83525 Only) PSM Power Sweep On/Off
C4 External Crystal Marker Frequency RCN Recall Register
83522/83525 Onl | © Be
| / nly) REM RF Power On/Off
DF Delta F Frequency Span RM Service Request Mask
DM dBm RPm RF Blanking On/Off
DN Step Down/Decrement RS Reset Sweep
DPm Display Blanking On/Off Se Second
DUm Display Update On/Off ECONES
SF Frequency Step Size
E Exponent Power Of 10 SH Shift Function
FA Start Frequency Sm Stope On/Off
FB Stop Frequency SM Manual Sweep
Fim CW Filter In/Out SP Power Step Size
F1 —20 MHz/V FM 55 Step Size
F2 —6 MHz/V FM ST Sweep Time
C7 GHz SVn Save Register
5X external Sweep
HZ Hz
TS Take Sweep
IL Input Learn String T1 Internal Sweep Trigger
IP Instrument Preset т? Line Sweep Trigger
IX Input Micro Learn String TI External Sweep Trigger
KZ KHz T4 Single Sweep
MC Marker To Center Frequency UP Step Up/Increment
MDm Square Wave Amplitude Modula- VR CW Vernier
tion On/Off
MO Marker Off 0-9 + — Acceptable Numeric Data
NOTES
1. Program codes of the form “XXm' use “m” to turn the function On or Off (1 or 0). For the storage register
functions the “n” is 1 through 9.
2. The 8350A ignores spaces, plus signs, negative signs (except when valid) and any unexpected characters.
Program codes can be upper or lower case alpha characters.
For more information, call your local HP Sales Office or nearest Regional Office: Eastern (201) 765-5000; Midwestern (317) 255.8800: Southern (404) 955-1560; Western (213)
970-7500, Canadian (416) 678-9430. Ask the operator for instrument sales, Or write Hewieit-Packard, 1501 Page Mil Road, Palo Alto, CA 94304, In Europe: Hewlett-Packard
S.A. 7, rue du Bois-du-lan, P.O, Box, CH 1217 Meyrin 2. Geneva, Switzerland, in Japan: Yokogawa-Hewteit-Packard Ltd., 29-21, Takaido-Higashi 3-chome, Suginami-ku, Tokyo 168.
5952-3307 Printed in U.S.A,
ea
8350A/8
Supersedes: None
Iscillator
INTRODUCTION
This programming note is a guide to the remote
operation of the HP 8350A Sweep Oscillator and
appropriate HP 83500 Series Plug-in using the HP
85A Personal Computer, Included in this guide are
the system connections for remote operation and
several example programs with descriptions of each
step.
The 8350A is fully compatible with the Hewlett-
Packard Interface Bus (HP-18). When used with a
controller such as the 85A, complete control of the
sweep mode, frequency limits, frequency markers,
power level, and all other front panel controls can be
achieved.
REFERENCE INFORMATION
For further information on the HP Interface Bus, the
following references should prove helpful:
86 Condensed Description of the Hewlett-Packard
Interface Bus (HP Literature No. 59401-90030).
Complete reference information on the 8350A can
be found in the 8350A Sweep Oscillator Operating
and Service Manual (HP Part No. 08350-90601). For
information on operating the 85A the following
references are available:
® 85A Owners Manual and Programming Guide
(HP Part No. 00085-90002),
86 85A I/O Programming Guide (HP Part No.
00085-90142).
Re TH Ee Ne DOE
O HEWLETT-PACKARD CO. 1980
ZE
SUP TONTA ATC Senor o nes
TON a Cue ee EAS
TT ae pr Mee TT CET TE
ESS CN TC er Mr ea =
WE ay pe To
COQUIPMENT REQUIRED
To performall the example programs as describedin
this programming note, you will need the following
equipment and accessories:
1.
2.
HP 8350A Sweep Oscillator with any HP 83500
Series Plug-in. Note that an HP 86200 Series
Plug-in withthe HP 11869A Adapter can be used
but all references to power level and power
control are not applicable.
HP 85A Personal Computer with:
a. HP Part No. 00085-15003 1/0 ROM
b. HP 82936A ROM Drawer
с. HP 82937A HP-1B interface Card/Cable
NOTE
The following equipment is not required for the
programs to function but rather for a visual
display of the 8350A functions.
HP 87555 Frequency Response Test Set with:
a HP 8755C Swept Amplitude Analyzer
b. HP 180TR or 1827 Display Unit
c. HP 11664A or 116648 Detector
d. Two 120 centimetre BNC cables (HP 11170C
variety)
or any appropriate Oscilloscope with Crystal/
Schottky Detector, Attenuator, and BNC
Cabling,
Any test device over the frequency range of the
83500 Series Plug-in.
8350A/83500 PLUG-IN
т Cria J inp y Г E TT oy
85A
OOOO ВОО CO
БН НОО
ССЗ НОО
СЕЗОН О
СН DOCC
| | НОО
o
FIGURE 1: System Connection
SET-UP
Figure 1 shows the system connection and switch
settings for the 82937A HP—IB Interface and the
85A Personal Computer. The following procedure
completes the setup:
1. Turn off the power to the 85A.
2. Verify that the ROM is installed in the 835A. If
not, then install the ROM in the 82936A ROM
Drawer then insert the drawer in one of the rear
panel slots of the 85A.
3, Install the 82937A HP—IB Interface Card into
one of the rear panel slots of the 85A.
4. Connect the 24-pin HP-IB connector of the
82937A to the rear panel HP-1B connector of the
8350A. This connector is tapered to insure
proper connection.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to mate black metric threaded
screws on one connector with silver English
threaded nufs on another connector, or vice
versa, as damage may result. A metric conversion
kit which will convert one cable and one or two
instruments to metric hardware is available by
ordering HP Part No. 5060-0138.
5. All programs within this guide expect the 8350A
HP-IB address to be decimal 19. The 8350A HP-
IB address switches are located inside the
instrument and are factory preset to decimal 19,
To find the present HP-IB address use the front
panel “Set HP-IB Address” by executing: °
Press SHIFT [СЕ
The FREQUENCY/TIME display will indicate the
present decimal address. To reset the number
displayed if not 19:
Press 1 9 GHz
This HP-IB address will remain in effect until the
instrument is powered off since the internal
address switches are read at power on (unless
8350A Option 001 Non-volatile Memory is
used). Since Example 4 requires the 8350A to be
powered off and then on, the internal address
switches should be reset to 19 ¡f necessary.
CHECK-OUT
Turn on the 85A and the 8350A. The 85A should
display the cursor (“—") in the upper left corner of
the CRT display. The 8350A should undergo a turn-
on self test consisting of the red LED numeric
displays being blanked and all yellow indicator
LED's on, then the 8350A sweep controls are set to
the instrument preset state: Start/Stop Sweep over
the entire plug-in frequency range, fastest sweep
time for plug-in (typically 10 milliseconds), and
maximum leveled output power for the plug-in. If
the 8350A fails the power-on self test an error
message will be displayed in the far left LED display.
Check section 8 of the 8350A Operatingand Service
Manual for error message decoding and diagnostics.
To verify that the HP-IB connections and interface
are functional perform the following on the 85A:
1. Press SHIFT RESET
2. Type REMOTE 719
3. Press END LINE
Verify that the REMote light on the 8350A is lit. If
this fails, verify that the 82937 A select code switch is
set to “7” (this switch is located inside the 82937A
so refer to its Installation Manual), the 8350A
address switches are set to “19”, and the interface
cable is properly connected.
If the 85A display indicates an error message, it is
possible that the above remote message was typed
in incorrectly or the ROM's are not properly
installed. If the 85A accepts the remote statement
and the display is clear but the 8350A REMote light
does not turn on, you could have a defective
82937A or 8350A. Perform the operational checks
as outlined in the respective Operating and Service
Manuals to find the defective device.
PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES
The following sample programs show the various
ways of controlling the 8350A. In remote control
situations the 8350A Sweep Oscillator can interact
with the system HP-IB controller in two basic ways:
1, “Listen Mode’: The 8350A listens to the control
commands as to modifying the present instru-
ment state. This effectively commands the
8350A to do a specific event much like setting a
front panel function.
à. “Talk Mode”: The 8350A informs the controller
of the present instrument state with a numeric
value or a string of characters. This effectively
allows the userto interrogate orlearn any 8350A
function.
Each programming example is structured using the
following format:
1. Ageneral description of the functions exercised.
EXARAPLE PROCGRARA 3: Remote, Local, Local ©
2. The program listing.
3. An explanation of each program line,
4. Detailed instructions for operating the system.
Lockout, and Instrument Prose
Before programming the 8350A for different sweep
functions, the user should be aware of the extent of
remote control that can be used. The Remote
Fnable (REMOTE) command sets the 8350A into
remote control from the local (manual) mode. in
remote the 8350A will perform only as its functions
are programmed. However if the LOCAL button is
pressed, the 8350A will return from the remote state
to local control. To prevent this from occurring the
local Lockout (LOCAL LOCKOUT) command
disables all front panel controls, specifically the
“Local” key. The Go To Local (LOCAL) command
will return the 8350A to front panel control thereby
removing it from the remote and local lockout
modes. Note that the above remote and local
commands are different from the general HP-1B bus
local and remote commands (LOCAL 7° and
REMOTE 7’). Finally, in remote control it is peri-
odically desirable to reset the 8350A to a pre-
defined state, this is achievable with the Instrument
Preset function.
PROGRAM 1
PROGRAM T EXPLANATION,
Line 10: Sets 8350A to remote.
Line 20: The 85A displays “Remote”.
Line 30: Temporarily stops program execution.
Line 40: Sets 8350A to remote.
Line 50: Sets local lockout mode.
Line 60: The 85A displays “Local Lockout”.
Line 70: Temporarily stops program execution.
Line 80: Sets 8350A to local.
Line 90: The 85A displays “Local”.
Line 100: Temporarily stops program execution,
Line 110: Sets 8350A to remote and performs an
Instrument Preset,
Line 120: Stops program execution.
To verify and investigate the different remote
modes do the following:
AIN Г SCRATCH END LINE
on the 85A. This scratches the program memory.
2. Press INSTR PRESET on the 8350A.
3. Type in the above program.
4. Press SHIFT CLEAR RUN
on the 85A.
5. With the 85A displaying “Remote”, verify that
the 8350A REMote light is lit. From the front
panel, attempt to change the start frequency
and verify that this is impossible. Verify that the
Instrument Preset key and all other keys except
LCL are disabled. Now press the LCL key and
verifythatthe 8350A REMote lightis off and that
vou can modify any of the sweep functions.
6. Press CONT on the 85A. With the 85A dis-
playing “Local Lockout” verify that the 8350A
REMote light is again lit. Again attempt to
change the start frequency and perform an
instrument preset. Verify that this is impossible.
Now press the 8350A ‘LCL key and verify that
still no action is taken.
7. Press CONT
on the 85A. With the 85A
displaying“ Local” verify that the 8350A REMote
light is off. Also verify that all sweep functions
now can be modified via the front panel
controls.
CONT on the 85A. Verify that the 8350A
has undergone an instrument Preset and the
REMote light is on. The Output (OUTPUT 719")
statement does two things, one it performs a
"REMOTE 719", and second it passes data to the
8350A.
Note that the 8350A LCL key produces the same
result as programming LOCAL 7719" or LOCAL 7'. Be
careful as the latter command places all instruments
on the HP-1B in local state as opposed to the 8350A
alone,
EEAMPLE PROGRAM $:
Programming Functions
To program any function on the 8350A the con-
troller must pass specific program codes and data to
the sweeper. The statement that allows this is the
Output (OUTPUT) statement. The alphanumeric
data string of the output statement can be a conca-
tenation of character strings and/or variables. The
data can be specific codes, free field formatted data,
or reference a specific image (IMAGE) statement.
For example, to program the CW Frequency (CW),
one program code sequence is “CW”, followed by
the frequency in GHz, then "GZ". If the frequency is
to be 7.555 GHz, then the string “CW7.555GZ” will
suffice. However if the frequency were to change
then a variable 'F could indicate the frequency in
GHz and the program string could be “CW",F," GZ".
Using an image statement also allows a specific
number of digits to be passed, thereby avoiding any
unexpected round off errors,
NOTE
This program expects an 83500 Series Plug-in that
covers the frequency 7.555 GHz. fusing a plug-in
that does not cover this frequency then the value
in lines 20 and 30 should be changed to an
appropriate value.
PROGRAM 2
PROGRAM 2 EXPLANATIOR:
Line 10: Puts the 8350A into a predefined state via
instrument preset,
Puts the 8350A in CW mode and pro-
grams a CW frequency of 7.555 GHz.
Line 20:
Line 30: The 85A displays “CW = 7.555 GHz”.
Line 40: Temporarily stops program execution.
Line 50: The 85A displays “CW (in GHz) = ?”,
Line 60: The user is prompted to input a new CW
frequency value which is stored in the
variable 'F',
Line 70: Print on the CRT display the programmed
CW frequency.
Line 80: Program the CW frequency using the
default data format.
Line 90: Go to line 50.
Line 100: Image statement is set up for program-
ming the CW frequency with a 1 MHz
resolution,
Line 110: Program the CW frequency via image
statement in line 100.
Line 120: Go to line 50.
The equipment setup is the same as the previous
example, Reset the 85A, scratch the 85A memory,
then type in the above program. Then perform the
following:
1. Clearthe 85A CRT display then run the program.
The 85A displays “CW = 7.555 GHz”. The
8350A changes from the instrument preset state
of Start/Stop sweep to a CW frequency of 7.555
GHz.
2. Press CONT onthe 85A. The 85A now displays
“СМУ (т GHz) =?" Type in a new CW frequency
(value in GHz), then press END'LINE
3. The 8350A will be programmed to the new CW
frequency with the new value printed on the
internal printer. The program jumps back to step
(2) above.
When inputting the CW frequency try several
values, each with a different number of digits after
the decimal point. Notice that the 8350A displays
the frequency to 3 decimal places (1 MHz fre-
quency resolution). Values with better than 1 MHz
frequency resolution are rounded to the nearest
MHz by the 8350A. However the 85A outputs data
in a free-field format that outputs a number with all
appropriate significant digits. Another approach is
to utilize the image statement to set the desired
number of decimal places. To use the image
statement in the program, perform the following on
the 85A:
Press PAUSE SHIFT CLEAR
Type DELETE 80, 90
Press END: LINE
This should delete lines 80 and 90 from program #2
and allow the use of lines 100, 110, and 120 instead.
Run the modified program again and use the same
steps for operation as before, Now if the value
inputted has a frequency resolution greater than 1
MHz the 85A does the rounding instead of the
8350A. This is the preferred programming approach.
Change the image statement for 10 MHz frequency
resolution and verify the results from the 8350A
frequency display.
Since a device select code address can be a variable,
verify that this can be used in the modified or
original program #2 by doing the following:
1, Insert before line 10 a new line with the variable
'S” by:
Press PAUSE SHIFT CLEAR
Type '5 $=71 9”
Press END UNE
EXAMPLE PROGRAM 3:
2. Modify the output statement(s) by editing the
necessary lines and changing the
"OUTPUT 719" to 'QUTPUT $ and
'QUTPUT 719 USING 100 to "OUTPUT S
USING 100”,
3. Re-run the modified program using the same
operation steps as above.
Setting Up A Typical Sweep
Typically the sweeper is programmed for the proper
sweep frequency range, sweep time, power level,
and marker frequencies for a test measurement.
This program sets up the sweeper for a general
purpose situation using several dedicated image
statements. Note that not all parameters need to be
reprogrammed every time.
NOTE
This program expects an 83500 Series Plug-in that
covers the frequency range of at least 3 to 7 GHz.
if using a plug-in with a different frequency range,
change the values in lines 60, 90, and 100, to the
appropriate values, If using an 86200 Series Plug-
in then do not enter line 70.
PROGRAM 3
PROGRAM 3 EXPLANATION:
Line 10: Image statement for setting the Start and
Stop Sweep frequencies in GHz.
Line 20: Image statement for setting the Sweep
Time in milliseconds.
Line 30: Image statement for setting a Frequency
Marker by marker number and frequency
in GHz.
Line 40: Image statement for setting the Output
Power Level in dBm.
Line 50: Preset the sweeper to a known state via
instrument preset and enable the internal
27.8 kHz Square Wave Amplitude
Modulation.
Line 60: Seta Start/Stop Sweep of 3.0 to 7,0 GHz.
Line 70: Set the Output Power Level to +10 aBm.
Line 80: Set the Sweep Time to 50 milliseconds.
Line 90: Set Marker £1 to 4 GHZ.
Line 100: Set Marker #2 to 6 GHz.
Line 110: Stop program execution.
Setup the equipment as shown in figure 2 by adding
the 8755C, the 180TR or 182T, the 11664, and a test
device like a 4 to 6 GHz Bandpass Filter, It is
important that the two rear panel connections from
the 8350A to the 8755C/182T are made fora proper
CRT display. For the example measurement set the
following front panel controls:
On the 8755C:
Channel 1:
Display ......... OFF (press all the display
push buttons so that they are all out)
Channel 2:
Display «vivre B
dB/DIV. 11111044 44444400 a 4 4 ea 0 40 10 dB
Reference Level.............e...e. -T0 dB
Reference Level Vernier,......... vw... OFF
On the 182T or 180TR:
Magnifier .......... oo iii XT
Display ............-.0s0<0re0reerveer oa». INT
After connecting the equipment: reset the 85A,
scratch the 85A memory, then type in the above
program, Clear the 85A CRT display then run the
program. The 8350A will initially undergo an
instrument preset which will set the proper power
leveling mode and sweep blanking signals. Since the
8755C requires the RF signal to be modulated at a
27.8 kHz rate, the internal amplitude modulation is
8755E/1827 SWEPT
HP 85
PERSONAL EOMPUTER SI80A
SWEEP OSCILLATOR
POS Z-BLANK
FL Ten
ER Sweep QUT/IN AUX “D”.
{Front or Rear}
DEVICE 11664
UNDER TEST DETECTOR
FIGURE 2: Equipment Setup For Program #3
enabled. If usinga 4 to 6 GHz Bandpass Filter as the
test device, the CRT display should reflect the filter
transmission response over the 3 to 7 GHz range.
Two frequency markers of the Z-Axis Intensity dot
variety are set to 4 and 6 GHz, hopefully within the
passband or near the 3 dB points. The setup can be
modified by changing the values in lines 60, 70, 80,
90, and/or 100, then re-run the program.
EXAMPLE PROGRAM 4:
Learning An instrument State
Being able to save a specific instrument state is
helpful when itis needed several times in a test or
measurement procedure, The user could save the
instrument state by manually togging the important
sweep parameters such as frequency range, power
level, ALC modes, etc., then re-inputting them atthe
appropriate time. A somewhat simpler approach is
to save the instrument state in one of the 8350A
internal storage registers, then recall it when
needed. However, this is not a permanent solution
unless the 8350A Non-volatile Memory option
(Option 001) is used. A more permanent solution is
to use the Output Learn String function ofthe 8350A
PROGRAM 4 EXPLANATION:
PROGRAM 4
so that the 85A can learn then store a data string that Line 10: Define the firstelement of any array to be
describes the present instrument state on a tape at index number 1.
cartridge or in its’ internal memory. Once an Line 20: Set the length of the A$ string to 100
instrument state is stored or learned, the 8350A can characters.
then be restored to that state using the Input Learn Line 30: Setup the string A$ as an 1/0 Buffer for
String function. The power of these instrument data storage in fast read/write data
Learn/Teach functions are demonstrated by the transfer operations.
following program using the 85A fast data transfer Line 40: Set the 8350A to a predefined state via
function. instrument preset and enable the square
wave modulation.
Line 50: Return the 8350A to local control,
Line 60: Temporarily stop program execution.
Line 70: Program the 8350A to output the Learn
String,
Line 80: Read the Learn String into the 85A via the
fast data transfer function using the HP-1B
EO! (End or Identify) signal to terminate
the transfer, Store the Learn String in AS.
Line 90: Extract the Learn String information from
the 1/0 Buffer by removing the buffer
pointers. Re-save the Learn String only in
AS.
Line 100: Temporarily stop program execution.
Line 110: Program the 8350A to accept a Learn
String, then send the new Learn String to
the 8350A.
Line 120: Stop program execution.
Setup the equipment as in example 3 using the
analyzers’ CRT display to verify the sweep settings.
Note that the original equipment setup can also be
EXAMPLE PROGRAM 5:
used with the 8350A front panel indicators used for
verification. Reset the 85A, scratch the 85A memory,
then type in the above program. Clear the 85A CRT
display then run the program. The 8350A will
undergo an instrument preset, enable the square
wave modulation, then return to local front panel
control. Then perform the following
1. Adjust the 8350A to a preferred instrument
state, then press CONT on the 85A.
2. Turnthe 8350A line poweroff. Wait five seconds
then turn the 8350A power back on. Press
INSTR PRESET on the 8350A.
3. Press CONT onthe 85A. Verify on the analyzers’
CRT display and/or the 8350A that the original
instrument state has been restored.
interrogating The Present Value Of A Function
While the 8350A Learn String enables the user to
completely save a string of characters that define
the present instrument state, the information is
densely packed and encoded to save memory space.
If the user wishes to determine the actual value ofa
specific parameter, say the Start Frequency, it would
require a tedious process to extract a numeric value
from several characters within the Learn String. An
easier approach is to use the Output interrogated
Parameter function of the 8350A. With this function
the 85A instructs the 8350A to output the present
numeric value of a specified function. Any function
that has a numeric value associated with it (except
Step Size) can be interrogated. Note that if the
parameter is not presently active, the 8350A uses a
computed value or its previous value. The following
program demonstrates the capability of the inter-
rogate function.
PROGRAM 5
PROGRAM 5 EXPLANATION:
Line 10: Setthe 8350A to a predefined instrument
state via instrument preset and enable
the square wave modulation.
Line 20: Return the 8350A to local control.
Line 30: Temporarily stops program execution,
Line 40: Program the 8350A to output the present
value of the Start Frequency.
Line 50: Read the value into the 85A and store It In
the variable ’A’.
Line 60: Print on the internal printer the present
value of the Start Frequency in MHz.
Line 70: Program the 8350A to output the present
vaiue of the Stop Frequency.
Line 80: Read the vaiue into the 85A and store tin
the variable 'B’.
Line 90: Print on the internal printer the present
value of the Stop Frequency in MHZ.
Line 100: Program the 8350A to output the present
value of the Sweep Time,
Line 110: Read the value into the 85A and store It in
the variable ТГ.
Line 120: Print on the internal printer the present
value of the Sweep Time in milliseconds.
Line 130: Stops program execution.
Setup the equipment as in example 3 using the
analyzers’ CRT display to verify the sweep settings.
Note that the original equipment setup can also be
used with the 8350A front panel indicators used for
verification. Reset the 85A, scratch the 85A memory,
then type in the above program, Clear the 85A CRT
display then run the program. The 8350A will
undergo an instrument preset, enable the square
wave modulation, then return to local front panel
control. Then perform the following:
1. Adjustthe 8350A toa preferred instrument state
using the Start Frequency, Stop Frequency, and
Sweep Time controls.
EXAMPLE PEOGRAM 6: A Stepped CW Sweep
2. Press €
on the 85A.
3. The present values of the Start Frequency, Stop
Frequency, and Sweep Time are sequentially
interrogated and then printed on the internai
printer of the 85A.
Present automatic measurement systems typically
make measurements at a sequence of CW fest
frequencies instead of analog sweeping the fre-
quency range of interest, If swept, the measurement
data taking machine would need to sample the RF
signal at a very fast rate to maintain accurate fre-
quency information, too. This is typically notaccom-
plished. Stepped CW sweeps can be accomplished
in several ways with the 8350A:
1. Program sequential CW test frequencies.
2. Program the frequency sweep range then
enable the manual sweep mode. Perform a
stepped manual sweep by repetitively program-
ming the step up/increment function.
3. Program the CW frequency to the start fre-
quency, the Step Size to an appropriate value,
then repetitively program the step up/incre-
ment function,
Considering the speed of programming the above
approaches, the third is the most efficient time wise.
This program illustrates a stepped sweep using this
approach.
PROGRAM 6
PROGRAM 6 EXPLANATION:
Line 10: Setthe 8350Ato a predefined instrument
state and enable the square wave
modulation,
Line 20: The 85A displays “Start Freq (GHz) = 7".
Line 30: Input prompts for start frequency of the
sweep. Store it in the variable ‘À’.
Line 40: The 85A displays “Stop Freg (GHz) =7",
Line 50: Input prompts for the stop frequency of
the sweep. Store it in В.
Line 60: The 85A displays “Step Size (GHz) =?".
Line 70: Input prompts for the step size of the
sweep. Store it in "CC,
Line 80: Determine the number of frequency
steps in sweep, store in 'D’.
Line 90: Set the CW Step Size.
Line 100: Set the CW frequency to the start fre-
quency value,
Line 110: lterate the CW step D’ times.
Line 120: Program the Step increment/Up function.
Line 130: Wait 20 milliseconds for settling.
Line 140: Continue step iteration.
Line 150: Go to line 100,
The equipment setup is the same as in the previous
example, Reset the 85A, scratch the 85A memory,
then type in the above program, Clear the 85A CRT
display then run the program. The 8350A will
undergo an instrument preset and enable the
square wave modulation. Then perform the
following:
1. The 85A will display “Start Freq (GHz) = 7,
Answer this prompt by inputting the desired
Start frequency (value in GHz) of the sweep,
then press END LINE
2. The 85A will display “Stop Freg (GHz) = 7,
Answer this prompt with the desired Stop
frequency (in GHz) of the sweep, then press
“END LINE
3. The 85A will display “Step Size (GHz) = 1".
Answer this prompt with the desired Step size
(in GHz) of the sweep, then press END LINE
4. The 8350A CW frequency will be programmed
to the Start frequency of the sweep selected.
Then the CW frequency is repetitively incre-
mented by the step size value. The sweep is
then restarted after reaching the stop frequency.
To stop the program press STOP.
Since part of the time involved in changing CW
frequencies is nm updating the numeric LED display if
this could be defeated the CW frequency time can
be optimized. Note that one drawback is that the
numeric display will not indicate the present fre-
quency. The 8350A provides a Display Update
On/Off function and it can be implemented by
“+
uw
sing
2
CKARAPLE PROGRAM 7: U Service |
Certain error conditions of the 8350A can be
detected by the 85A so that corrective action can be
taken. Examples of some detectable error condi-
tions are RF power unleveled, numeric data entry
out of range, and line power failure. If an error
condition exists, the user can instruct the 8350A to
request service from the 85A by initiating a Service
Request (SRQ). The 85A can detect whetheran SRQ
has taken place on the bus by analyzing bit 7 (see
note below) of the Status Byte of the 82937A HP-1B
Interface. Two modes are available foranalyzing the
82937A Status Byte: 1) periodically read the Status
Byte, or 2) enable bit 7 to interrupt the program
when it is set. In either case, once it is determined
that the 8350A has requested service, the specific
error condition(s) can then be determined by
TABLE 1:
éruesis, 51
modifying line 10 to be:
OUTPUT 719 ;/1PMD1DUO”
Then re-run the modified program using the same
Operation steps as above.
reading and analyzing the Status Bytes of the 8350A.
The 8350A has two Status Bytes, each consisting of 8
bits with each bit indicating the present status of a
particular function or condition. See Figure 3 for a">